HD785.985-5 Operation Manual

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 308
At a glance
Powered by AI
The manual outlines safety procedures and guidelines for operating heavy machinery safely and effectively. It emphasizes reading the manual thoroughly before use.

The manual mentions signals words like WARNING and CAUTION to highlight potential hazards. It also mentions reading safety labels on the machine and following rules for operation and maintenance.

The manual describes different parts of the machine like the engine, steering system, payload meter, tires, etc. It also outlines the electric and hydraulic systems.

TEN00042-03

DUMP TRUCK HD785 -5


SERIAL NUMBERS 4254 and up

WARNING
Unsafe Use of this machine may cause serious injury or
Death.Operators and maintenance personnel must read
this manual before operating or maintaining this machine.
This manual should be kept near the machine for
reference and periodically reviewed by all personnel
who will come into contact with it .

NOTICE
Komatsu has Operation & Maintenance Manuals written
in some other languages. if a foreign language manual
is necessary, contact your local distributor for
availability.
.

1-1
.

FOREWORD FOREWORD

FOREWORD
This manual provides rules and guidelines which will help you use this machine safely and effectively. The
precautions in this manual must be followed at all times when performing operation and maintenance. Most
accidents are caused by the failure to follow fundamental safety rules for the operation and maintenance of
machines. Accidents can be prevented by knowing beforehand conditions that may cause a hazard when
performing operation and maintenance.

WARNING
Operators and maintenance personnel must always do as follows before beginning operation or maintenance.

Always be sure to read and understand this manual thoroughly before performing operation and maintenance.

Read the safety messages given in this manual and the safety labels affixed to the machine thoroughly and be sure that you
understand them fully.

Keep this manual in the storage location for the operation and maintenance manual given below, and have all personnel read it
periodically.

If this manual has been lost or has become dirty and cannot be read, request a replacement manual immediately from Komatsu
or your Komatsu distributor.

If you sell the machine, be sure to give this manual to the new owners together with the machine.

Komatsu delivers machines that comply with all applicable regulations and standards of the country to which it has been shipped.
If this machine has been purchased in another country or purchased from someone in another country, it may lack certain safety
devices and specifications that are necessary for use in your country. If there is any question about whether your product
complies with the applicable standards and regulations of your country, consult Komatsu or your Komatsu distributor before
operating the machine.

Place to Keep the Manual


It is located behind the operator's seat.

1-2
.

FOREWORD FOREWORD

1-3
.

FOREWORD FOREWORD

1-4
.

FOREWORD SAFETY INFORMATION

SAFETY INFORMATION
To enable you to use this machine safely, safety precautions and labels are given in this manual and affixed to the
machine to give explanations of situations involving potential hazards and of the methods of avoiding such
situations.

Signal words

The following signal words are used to inform you that there is a potential hazardous situation that may lead to
personal injury or damage.
In this manual and on machine labels, the following signal words are used to express the potential level of hazard.

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury. This word is used also to alert against unsafe practices that may cause
property damage.

Example of safety message using signal word

WARNING
When standing up from the operator's seat, always place the safety lock lever in the LOCK position.
If you accidentally touch the control levers when they are not locked, this may cause a serious injury or death.

Other signal words

In addition to the above, the following signal words are used to indicate precautions that should be followed to
protect the machine or to give information that is useful to know.

This word is used for precautions that must be taken to avoid actions which could shorten
the life of the machine.

This word is used for information that is useful to know.

1-5
.

SAFETY INFORMATION FOREWORD

Safety labels

Safety labels are affixed to the machine to inform the operator or maintenance worker on the spot when carrying out
operation or maintenance of the machine that may involve hazard.
This machine uses "Safety labels using words" and "Safety labels using pictograms" to indicate safety procedures.

Example of safety label using words

Safety labels using pictogram


Safety pictograms use a picture to express a level of hazardous
condition equivalent to the signal word. These safety pictograms
use pictures in order to let the operator or maintenance worker
understand the level and type of hazardous condition at all times.
Safety pictograms show the type of hazardous condition at the top
or left side, and the method of avoiding the hazardous condition at
the bottom or right side. In addition, the type of hazardous condition
is displayed inside a triangle and the method of avoiding the
hazardous condition is shown inside a circle.

Komatsu cannot predict every circumstance that might involve a potential hazard in operation and maintenance.
Therefore, the safety messages in this manual and on the machine may not include all possible safety precautions.
If any procedures or actions not specifically recommended or allowed in this manual are used, it is your responsibility
to take the necessary steps to ensure safety.
In no event should you engage in prohibited uses or actions described in this manual.

The explanations, values, and illustrations in this manual were prepared based on the latest information available
at that time. Continuing improvements in the design of this machine can lead to changes in detail which may not
be reflected in this manual. Consult Komatsu or your Komatsu distributor for the latest available information of your
machine or for questions regarding information in this manual.

The numbers in circles in the illustrations correspond to the numbers in ( ) in the text. (For example: 1 -> (1))

1-6
.

FOREWORD INTENDED USE

INTENDED USE
DIRECTIONS OF MACHINE

In this manual, the directions of the machine (front, rear, left, right) are determined according to the view from the
operator's seat in the direction of travel (front) of the machine.

1-7
.

LOCATION OF PLATES, TABLE TO ENTER SERIAL NO. AND DISTRIBUTOR FOREWORD

LOCATION OF PLATES, TABLE TO ENTER SERIAL NO. AND


DISTRIBUTOR
When requesting service or ordering replacement parts, please inform your Komatsu distributor of the following
items.

PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN)/MACHINE SERIAL NO. PLATE


It is located on the left front end of the frame.
The design of the nameplate differs according to the territory.

ENGINE SERIAL NO. PLATE POSITION


The engine serial number plate is on the upper right side of (viewed
from the fan) the cylinder block (on the intake manifold cover).

SERVICE METER POSITION


It is located on the right side of the meter section.

1-8
.

FOREWORD LOCATION OF PLATES, TABLE TO ENTER SERIAL NO. AND DISTRIBUTOR

TABLE TO ENTER SERIAL NO. AND DISTRIBUTOR

Machine serial No.

Engine serial No.

Product identification number (PIN)

Distributor name

Address

Service Personnel

Phone/Fax

1-9
.

CONTENTS FOREWORD

CONTENTS
FOREWORD 1- 1
FOREWORD 1- 2
SAFETY INFORMATION 1- 5
INTENDED USE 1- 7
DIRECTIONS OF MACHINE 1- 7
LOCATION OF PLATES, TABLE TO ENTER SERIAL NO. AND DISTRIBUTOR 1- 8
PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN)/MACHINE SERIAL NO. PLATE 1- 8
ENGINE SERIAL NO. PLATE POSITION 1- 8
SERVICE METER POSITION 1- 8
TABLE TO ENTER SERIAL NO. AND DISTRIBUTOR 1- 9
SAFETY 2- 1
SAFETY INFORMATION 2- 2
SAFETY LABELS 2- 4
POSITION FOR ATTACHING SAFETY LABELS 2- 5
SAFETY LABELS 2- 6
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS 2- 11
PRECAUTIONS DURING OPERATION 2- 19
BEFORE STARTING ENGINE 2- 19
AFTER STARTING ENGINE 2- 21
BATTERY 2- 24
TOWING 2- 26
PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE 2- 27
PRECAUTIONS WITH TIRES 2- 33
OPERATION 3- 1
GENERAL VIEW 3- 2
GENERAL VIEW OF MACHINE 3- 2
GENERAL VIEW OF CONTROLS AND GAUGES 3- 3
EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS 3- 5
MACHINE MONITOR 3- 5
SWITCHES 3- 22
CONTROL LEVERS AND PEDALS 3- 30
MECHATRONICS EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER 3- 34
SAFETY PIN 3- 35
DUST INDICATOR 3- 35
FUSES 3- 36
CAR STEREO 3- 38
AIR CONDITIONER 3- 47
CAR HEATER 3- 52
LOCATION OF FIRE EXTINGUISHER 3- 53
LOCATION OF FIRST AID KIT 3- 53
OPERATION 3- 54
CHECK BEFORE STARTING ENGINE 3- 54
STARTING ENGINE 3- 70
OPERATIONS, CHECKS AFTER STARTING ENGINE 3- 73
STOPPING ENGINE 3- 74
CHECKS AFTER STOPPING ENGINE 3- 74
MOVING MACHINE OFF (FORWARD, REVERSE), STOPPING 3- 75
SHIFTING GEAR 3- 80
TRAVELING DOWNHILL 3- 81

1 - 10
.

FOREWORD CONTENTS

STEERING THE MACHINE 3- 87


LOADING OPERATIONS 3- 87
DUMP OPERATIONS 3- 88
PRECAUTIONS FOR OPERATION 3- 89
PARKING MACHINE 3- 90
CHECKS AFTER COMPLETION OF WORK 3- 91
DRAIN WATER FROM AIR TANK 3- 91
LOCKING 3- 92
HANDLING TIRES 3- 93
DETERMINING AND MAINTAINING TRAVEL ROAD 3- 95
DETERMINING TRAVEL ROAD 3- 95
MAINTAINING TRAVEL ROAD 3- 95
TRANSPORTATION 3- 96
PRECAUTIONS WHEN TRANSPORTING 3- 96
STEPS FOR TRANSPORTATION 3- 96
METHOD OF SECURING MACHINE 3- 97
METHOD OF LIFTING MACHINE 3- 98
COLD WEATHER OPERATION 3-100
PRECAUTIONS FOR LOW TEMPERATURE 3-100
PRECAUTIONS AFTER COMPLETION OF WORK 3-101
AFTER COLD WEATHER 3-102
LONG-TERM STORAGE 3-103
BEFORE STORAGE 3-103
DURING STORAGE 3-103
AFTER STORAGE 3-103
PRECAUTIONS BEFORE TRAVELING AFTER LONG-TERM STORAGE 3-103
TROUBLESHOOTING 3-104
AFTER RUNNING OUT OF FUEL 3-104
METHOD OF TOWING MACHINE 3-104
IF BATTERY IS DISCHARGED 3-109
OTHER TROUBLE 3-113
MAINTENANCE 4- 1
GUIDES TO MAINTENANCE 4- 2
OUTLINE OF SERVICE 4- 4
HANDLING OIL, FUEL, COOLANT, AND PERFORMING OIL CLINIC 4- 4
OUTLINE OF ELECTRIC SYSTEM 4- 7
WEAR PARTS 4- 8
WEAR PARTS LIST 4- 8
RECOMMENDED FUEL, COOLANT, AND LUBRICANT 4- 9
USE OF FUEL, COOLANT AND LUBRICANTS ACCORDING TO AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 4- 10
RECOMMENDED BRANDS, RECOMMENDED QUALITY FOR PRODUCTS OTHER THAN
KOMATSU GENUINE OIL 4- 11
STANDARD TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR BOLTS AND NUTS 4- 12
TORQUE LIST 4- 12
PERIODIC REPLACEMENT OF SAFETY CRITICAL PARTS 4- 13
SAFETY CRITICAL PARTS 4- 14
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE CHART 4- 15
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE CHART 4- 15
SERVICE PROCEDURE 4- 18
INITIAL 250 HOURS SERVICE (ONLY AFTER THE FIRST 250 HOURS) 4- 18

1 - 11
.

CONTENTS FOREWORD

WHEN REQUIRED 4- 19
CHECK BEFORE STARTING 4- 36
EVERY 100 HOURS SERVICE 4- 37
EVERY 250 HOURS SERVICE 4- 38
EVERY 500 HOURS SERVICE 4- 53
EVERY 1000 HOURS SERVICE 4- 58
EVERY 2000 HOURS SERVICE 4- 63
EVERY 4000 HOURS SERVICE 4- 69
EVERY 15000 HOURS SERVICE 4- 71
SPECIFICATIONS 5- 1
SPECIFICATIONS 5- 2
ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS 6- 1
HANDLING PAYLOAD METER 6- 2
NAME OF PARTS 6- 2
EXTERNAL DISPLAY LAMPS 6- 3
OPERATING PAYLOAD METER 6- 5
TACHOGRAPH (TCO 15-6) 6- 13
EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS 6- 13
METHOD OF USING KEY 6- 15
METHOD OF USE 6- 15
REVO TACHOGRAPH (TCO 15-7) 6- 17
EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS 6- 17
METHOD OF USE 6- 19
USING DIFFERENTIAL LOCK 6- 21
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK PEDAL 6- 21
PRECAUTIONS AND METHOD OF USE 6- 22
OPERATION OF ABS AND ABS/ASR 6- 23
EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS 6- 23
OPERATION METHOD 6- 25
PRECAUTIONS FOR USE 6- 26
TROUBLESHOOTING 6- 26
ARSC (AUTOMATIC RETARDER SPEED CONTROL) 6- 27
EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS 6- 28
METHOD OF OPERATION 6- 30
TROUBLESHOOTING 6- 32
PMC (POWERTRAIN MANAGEMENT CONTROLLER) AND MOM (MESSAGE FOR
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE) 6- 35
CHECK BEFORE STARTING 6- 35
ABNORMALITY DISPLAYED DURING OPERATION 6- 35
HOW TO DOWNLOAD THE STORED DATA IN PMC AND OTHER CONTROLLERS 6- 35
MESSAGE FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (MOM) 6- 36
ASR-II (AUTOMATIC SPIN REGULATOR II) 6- 41
EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS 6- 41
ACTUATION OF ASR-II SYSTEM 6- 42
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING 6- 42
TROUBLESHOOTING 6- 43
HANDLING AUTO-GREASING SYSTEM 6- 45
OUTLINE OF AUTO-GREASING SYSTEM 6- 45
SETTING GREASE CAN 6- 46
INITIAL SETTING OF AUTO-GREASING SYSTEM 6- 47

1 - 12
.

FOREWORD CONTENTS

METHOD OF OPERATING AUTO-GREASING SYSTEM 6- 47


PRECAUTIONS WHEN HANDLING AUTO-GREASING SYSTEM 6- 48
POSITION OF EACH INJECTOR 6- 52
GREASING POINTS FOR EACH INJECTOR 6- 56
HIGH ALTITUDE SPECIFICATIONS 7- 1
EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS 7- 2
SERVICE PROCEDURE 7- 3
CHECK BEFORE STARTING 7- 3
EVERY 2000 HOURS SERVICE 7- 4
INDEX 8- 1

1 - 13
.

2-1
.

SAFETY INFORMATION SAFETY

SAFETY INFORMATION
SAFETY LABELS 2- 4
POSITION FOR ATTACHING SAFETY LABELS 2- 5
SAFETY LABELS 2- 6

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS 2- 11
SAFETY RULES 2- 11
IF ABNORMALITIES ARE FOUND 2- 11
CLOTHING AND PERSONAL PROTECTIVE ITEMS 2- 11
FIRE EXTINGUISHER AND FIRST AID KIT 2- 11
SAFETY FEATURES 2- 11
KEEP MACHINE CLEAN 2- 12
INSIDE OPERATOR'S COMPARTMENT 2- 12
ALWAYS APPLY LOCK WHEN LEAVING OPERATOR'S SEAT 2- 12
HANDRAILS AND STEPS 2- 13
MOUNTING AND DISMOUNTIN 2- 13
PREVENTION OF BURNS 2- 14
FIRE PREVENTION 2- 14
ACTION IF FIRE OCCURS 2- 15
WINDOW WASHER LIQUID 2- 15
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING ROPS (Roll Over Protective Structure) 2- 16
PRECAUTIONS FOR ATTACHMENTS 2- 16
UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATION 2- 16
SAFETY AT WORKSITE 2- 16
WORKING ON LOOSE GROUND 2- 17
DO NOT GO CLOSE TO HIGH-VOLTAGE CABLES 2- 17
ENSURE GOOD VISIBILITY 2- 17
PRECAUTIONS ON INDOOR VENTILATION 2- 18
CHECKING SIGNALMAN'S SIGNALS AND SIGNS 2- 18
ASBESTOS DUST HAZARD PREVENTION 2- 18

2-2
.

SAFETY SAFETY INFORMATION

PRECAUTIONS DURING OPERATION 2- 19


BEFORE STARTING ENGINE 2- 19
CHECKS BEFORE STARTING ENGINE, ADJUST 2- 19
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING ENGINE 2- 19
PRECAUTIONS IN COLD AREAS 2- 20
AFTER STARTING ENGINE 2- 21
CHECK AFTER STARTING ENGINE 2- 21
PRECAUTIONS WHEN TRAVELING FORWARD OR REVERSE 2- 21
PRECAUTIONS DURING OPERATION 2- 22
PRECAUTIONS WHEN TRAVELING ON THE SLOPES 2- 22
PRECAUTIONS WHEN OPERATING DUMP BODY 2- 22
PRECAUTIONS FOR OPERATION 2- 22
METHOD OF USING BRAKES 2- 22
PRECAUTIONS UNDER THE SNOWING AND FREEZING CONDITION 2- 23
PRECAUTIONS FOR PARKING 2- 23
BATTERY 2- 24
BATTERY HAZARD PREVENTION 2- 24
STARTING WITH BOOSTER CABLES 2- 25
TOWING 2- 26
WHEN TOWING 2- 26

PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE 2- 27


WARNING TAG 2- 27
KEEP WORK PLACE CLEAN AND TIDY 2- 27
APPOINT LEADER WHEN WORKING WITH OTHERS 2- 27
STOP ENGINE BEFORE CARRYING OUT INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 2- 28
TWO WORKERS FOR MAINTENANCE WHEN ENGINE IS RUNNING 2- 29
PROPER TOOLS 2- 29
HANDLING SUSPENTION CYLINDER 2- 30
PERSONNEL 2- 30
WORK UNDER THE MACHINE 2- 30
NOISE 2- 30
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USIN HAMMER 2- 30
REPAIR WELDING 2- 30
REMOVING BATTERY TERMINAL 2- 31
PRECAUTIONS WITH HIGH-PRESSURE OIL 2- 31
HANDLING HIGH-PRESSURE HOSES, PIPING 2- 31
WASTE MATERIALS 2- 31
MAINTENANCE OF AIR CONDITIONER 2- 31
COMPRESSED AIR 2- 32
PERIODIC REPLACEMENT OF SAFETY-CRITICAL PARTS 2- 32

PRECAUTIONS WITH TIRES 2- 33


HANDLING TIRES 2- 33
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STORING TIRE 2- 33

2-3
.

SAFETY LABELS SAFETY

SAFETY LABELS
The following warning signs and safety labels are used on this machine.
Be sure that you fully understand the correct position and content of labels.
To ensure that the content of labels can be read properly, be sure that they are in the correct place and always
keep them clean. When cleaning them, do not use organic solvents or gasoline. These may cause the labels to
peel off.
There are also other labels in addition to the warning signs and safety labels. Handle those labels in the same
way.
If the labels are damaged, lost, or cannot be read properly, replace them with new ones. For details of the part
numbers for the labels, see this manual or the actual label, and place an order with Komatsu distributor.

2-4
.

SAFETY SAFETY LABELS

POSITION FOR ATTACHING SAFETY LABELS

2-5
.

SAFETY LABELS SAFETY

SAFETY LABELS
(1) Roll-over protective structure (ROPS)
(09620-30201) (for North America)

(1) Roll-over protective structure (ROPS)


(09620-30202) (for Australia)

(2) Cautions for checking engine room


(09667-23001)

(3) Cautions while checking engine room


(without side cover for engine) (09667-23001)

(3) Cautions while checking engine room


(with side cover for engine) (09667-03001)

2-6
.

SAFETY SAFETY LABELS

(4) Caution for opening hydraulic tank cap (09653-03001)

(5) Caution for opening radiator cap (09668-03001)

(6) Warning for handling suspension (09659-33000)

2-7
.

SAFETY LABELS SAFETY

(7) Warnings for electric wire


Warnings for crush hazard when inspection and maintenance
Warnings for inspection of emergency steering system, emergency brake system
Warning for leaving operator's seat, stopping engine
Warning for retarder oil temperature
(561-93-61733)

(8) Cautions before starting


Cautions when traveling in reverse
Cautions for operating hoist control lever (dump lever)
(561-93-61723)

2-8
.

SAFETY SAFETY LABELS

(9) Caution when handling battery cable (09808-03000)

(10) Exhaust pipe is hot! (09817-A1103)

(11) Caution for avoiding falling down (09805-13000)

(12) Caution when handling battery (09664-30082)


(For North America only)

2-9
.

SAFETY LABELS SAFETY

(13) Caution when handling battery


(This plate is stick on the machine by the battery maker.)

(14) Jump start prohibited (09842-A0481)


(This plate is stick on the starting motor.)

2 - 10
.

SAFETY GENERAL PRECAUTIONS

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
SAFETY RULES
Only trained and authorized personnel can operate and maintain the machine.
Follow all safety rules, precautions and instructions when operating or performing maintenance on the machine.
If you are under the influence of alcohol or medication, your ability to safely operate or repair your machine may
be severly impaired putting yourself and everyone else on your jobsite in danger.
When working with another operator or with a person on worksite traffic duty, be sure that all personnel
understand all hand signals that are to be used.

IF PROBLEMS ARE FOUND


If you find any problems in the machine during operation or maintenance (noise, vibration, smell, incorrect gauges,
smoke, oil leakage, etc., or any abnormal display on the warning devices or monitor), report to the person in charge
and have the necessary action taken. Do not operate the machine until the problem has been corrected.

CLOTHING AND PERSONAL PROTECTIVE ITEMS


Do not wear loose clothing and accessories. There is a hazard that they may catch on control levers or other
protruding parts.
If you have long hair and it hangs out from your hard hat, there
is a hazard that it may get caught up in the machine, so tie your
hair up and be careful not to let it get caught.
Always wear a hard hat and safety shoes. If the nature of the
work requires it, wear safety glasses, mask, gloves, ear plugs,
and safety belt when operating or maintaining the machine.
Check that all protective equipment functions properly before
using it.

FIRE EXTINGUISHER AND FIRST AID KIT


Always follow the precautions below to prepare for action if any injury or fire should occur.
Be sure that fire extinguishers have been provided and read the
labels to ensure that you know how to use them in emergencies.
Carry out periodic inspection and maintenance to ensure that
the fire extinguisher can always be used.
Provide a first aid kit in the storage point. Carry out periodic
checks and add to the contents if necessary.

SAFETY FEATURES
Be sure that all guards and covers are in their proper position. Have guards and covers repaired immediately if
they are damaged.
Understand the method of use of safety features and use them properly.
Never remove any safety features. Always keep them in good operating condition.

2 - 11
.

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS SAFETY

KEEP MACHINE CLEAN


If water gets into the electrical system, there is a hazard that it will cause malfunctions or misoperation. Do not
use water or steam to wash the electrical system (sensors, connectors).
If inspection and maintenance is carried out when the machine
is still dirty with mud or oil, there is a hazard that you will slip and
fall, or that dirt or mud will get into your eyes. Always keep the
machine clean.

INSIDE OPERATOR'S COMPARTMENT


When entering the operator's compartment, always remove all mud and oil from the soles of your shoes.
If you operate the pedal with mud or oil affixed to your shoes, your foot may slip and this may cause a serious
accident.
Do not leave parts or tools lying around the operator's compartment.
Do not stick suction pads to the window glass. Suction pads act as a lens and may cause fire.
Do not use cellular telephones inside the operator's compartment when driving or operating the machine.
Never bring any dangerous objects such as flammable or explosive items into the operator's compartment.

ALWAYS APPLY LOCK WHEN LEAVING OPERATOR'S SEAT


Before adjusting or standing up from the operator's seat, always set the gear shift lever to the N position and the
parking brake valve lever to the PARKING position, then stop the engine.
If you touch or bump the control levers unintentionally, the machine could suddenly move, and cause an accident
that might result in bodily harm.
Place gear shift lever (1) at neutral and set parking brake valve
lever (2) to the PARKING position.
Lower the dump body, set the dump lever to the HOLD position,
then apply the lock.
Stop the engine. Apply all the lock and always remember to take
the key with you and keep where it should be.

2 - 12
.

SAFETY GENERAL PRECAUTIONS

HANDRAILS AND STEPS


To prevent personal injury caused by slipping or falling off the machine, always do as follows.
Use the handrails and steps marked by arrows in the diagram
below when getting on or off the machine.
A: For use when getting on or off the operator's seat from the left
door
B: For use when getting on or off the operator's seat from the
engine hood or right door

To ensure safety, always face the machine and maintain


three-point contact (both feet and one hand, or both hands and
one foot) with the handrails and steps to ensure that you support
yourself.
Do not grip the dump lever when getting on or off the machine.
Never climb on the engine hood or covers where there are no
non-slip pads.
Before getting on or off the machine, check the handrails and
steps, and if there is any oil, grease, or mud on them, wipe it off
immediately. In addition, repair any damage and tighten any
loose bolts.
Do not get on or off the machine while holding tools in your hand.

MOUNTING AND DISMOUNTING


Never jump on or off the machine. Never get on or off a moving machine.
If the machine starts to move when there is no operator on the machine, do not jump on to the machine and try
to stop it.

2 - 13
.

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS SAFETY

PREVENTION OF BURNS
Hot coolant
To prevent burns from hot water or steam spurting out when
checking or draining the coolant, wait for the water to cool to a
temperature where it is possible to touch the radiator cap by
hand before starting the operation. Even when the coolant has
cooled down, loosen the cap slowly to relieve the pressure
inside the radiator before removing the cap.
Hot oil
To prevent burns from hot oil spurting out when checking or
draining the oil, wait for the oil to cool to a temperature where it
is possible to touch the cap or plug by hand before starting the
operation. Even when the oil has cooled down, loosen the cap
or plug slowly to relieve the internal pressure before removing
the cap or plug.

FIRE PREVENTION
Fire caused by fuel or oil
Fuel, oil, antifreeze, and window washer liquid are particularly
flammable and can be hazardous. To prevent fire, always
observe the following:
Do not smoke or use any flame near fuel or oil.
Stop the engine before refueling.
Do not leave the machine while adding fuel or oil.
Tighten all fuel and oil caps securely.
Do not spill fuel on overheated surfaces or on parts of the
electrical system.
Use well-ventilated areas for adding or storing oil and fuel.
Keep oil and fuel in the determined place and do not allow
unauthorized persons to enter.
After adding fuel or oil, wipe up any spilled fuel or oil.
When carrying out grinding or welding work on the chassis,
move any flammable materials to a safe place before
starting.
When washing parts with oil, use a non-flammable oil. Diesel
oil and gasoline may catch fire, so do not use them.
Put greasy rags and other flammable materials into a safe
container to maintain safety at the work place.
Do not weld or use a cutting torch to cut any pipes or tubes
that contain flammable liquids.

2 - 14
.

SAFETY GENERAL PRECAUTIONS

Fire caused by accumulation of flammable material.


Remove any dry leaves, chips, pieces of paper, dust, or any other flammable materials accumulated or affixed
around the engine, exhaust manifold, muffler, or battery, or inside the undercovers.

Fire coming from electric wiring


Short circuits in the electrical system can cause fire.
Always keep electric wiring connections clean and securely tightened.
Check the wiring every day for looseness or damage. Tighten any loose connectors or wiring clamps. Repair
or replace any damaged wiring.

Fire coming from hydraulic line


Check that all the hose and tube clamps, guards, and cushions are securely fixed in position.
If they are loose, they may vibrate during operation and rub against other parts. This may lead to damage to the
hoses, and cause high-pressure oil to spurt out, leading to fire damage or serious injury.

Explosion caused by lighting equipment


When checking fuel, oil, battery electrolyte, window washer fluid, or coolant, always use lighting with
anti-explosion specifications. If such lighting equipment is not used, there is danger of explosion that may
cause serious injury.
When taking the electrical power for the lighting from the machine itself, follow the instructions in this manual.

ACTION IF FIRE OCCURS


If a fire occurs, escape from the machine as follows.
Turn the start switch OFF to stop the engine.
Use the handrails and steps to get off the machine.

WINDOW WASHER LIQUID


Use an ethyl alcohol base washer liquid.
Methyl alcohol base washer liquid may irritate your eyes, so do not use it.

2 - 15
.

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS SAFETY

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING ROPS (Roll Over Protective Structure)


Install ROPS when working in places where there is danger of
falling rocks, such as in mines and quarries, or in places where
there is danger of rolling over.
If ROPS is installed, do not remove it when operating the
machine.
ROPS is installed to protect the operator when machine rolls
over. When machine rolls over, ROPS supports its weight and
absorbs its impact energy.
If ROPS is modified, its strength may be reduced. When
modifying, consult your Komatsu distributor.
If ROPS is deformed by falling objects or by rolling over, its
strength lowers and its design functions cannot be maintained.
In this case, be sure to ask your Komatsu distributor about repair
method.
Even when the ROPS is installed, if you do not fasten your seat belt
securely, it cannot protect you properly. Always fasten your seat
belt when operating the machine.

PRECAUTIONS FOR ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS


When installing optional parts or attachments, there may be problems with safety or legal restrictions. Therefore
contact your Komatsu distributor for advice.
Any injuries, accidents, or product failures resulting from the use of unauthorized attachments or parts will not be
the responsibility of Komatsu.
When installing and using optional attachments, read the instruction manual for the attachment, and the general
information related to attachments in this manual.

UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATION
Any modification made without authorization from Komatsu can create hazards. Before making a modification,
consult your Komatsu distributor.
Komatsu will not be responsible for any injuries, accidents, product failures or other property damages resulting
from modifications made without authorization from Komatsu.

SAFETY AT WORKSITE
Before starting operations, thoroughly check the area for any unusual conditions that could be dangerous.
Check the terrain and condition of the ground at the worksite, and determine the safest method of operation. Do
not operate where there is a hazard of landslides or falling rocks.
Take necessary measures to prevent any unauthorized person from entering the operating area.
When traveling or operating in shallow water or on soft ground, check the shape and condition of the bedrock, and
the depth and speed of flow of the water before starting operations.
Always design and maintain the roads on the jobsite so that the machines can travel safely.

2 - 16
.

SAFETY GENERAL PRECAUTIONS

WORKING ON LOOSE GROUND


Avoid traveling or operating your machine too close to the edge of cliffs, overhangs, and deep ditches. The
ground may be weak in such areas. If the ground should collapse under the weight or vibration of the machine,
there is a hazard that the machine may fall or tip over. Remember that the soil after heavy rain or blasting or after
earthquakes is weak in these areas.
When working on embankments or near excavated ditches, there is a hazard that the weight and vibration of the
machine will cause the soil to collapse. Before starting operations, take steps to ensure that the ground is safe
and to prevent the machine from rolling over or falling.

DO NOT GO CLOSE TO HIGH-VOLTAGE CABLES


Do not travel or operate the machine near electric cables. There is a hazard of electric shock, which may cause
serious injury or property damage. On jobsites where the machine may go close to electric cables, always do as
follows.
Before starting work near electric cables, inform the local power company of the work to be performed, and ask
them to take the necessary action.
Even going close to high-voltage cables can cause electric
shock, which may cause serious burns or even death. Always
Voltage of Cables Safety Distance
maintain a safe distance (see the table on the right) between the 100 V - 200 V Over 2 m (7 ft)
machine and the electric cable. Check with the local power 6,600 V Over 2 m (7 ft)
company about safe operating procedure before starting 22,000 V Over 3 m (10 ft)
operations. 66,000 V Over 4 m (14 ft)
To prepare for any possible emergencies, wear rubber shoes 154,000 V Over 5 m (17 ft)
and gloves. Lay a rubber sheet on top of the seat, and be careful
187,000 V Over 6 m (20 ft)
not to touch the chassis with any exposed part of your body.
275,000 V Over 7 m (23 ft)
Use a signalman to give warning if the machine approaches too
close to the electric cables. 500,000 V Over 11 m (36 ft)
When carrying out operations near high voltage cables, do not
let anyone near the machine.
If the machine should come too close or touch the electric cable, to prevent electric shock, the operator should
not leave the operator's compartment until it has been confirmed that the electricity has been shut off.
Also, do not let anyone near the machine.

ENSURE GOOD VISIBILITY


Check for any persons or obstacles in the area around the machine and check the conditions of the jobsite to
ensure that operations and travel can be carried out safely. Always do as follows.
When working in dark places, turn on the working lamp and front lamps installed to the machine, and set up
additional lighting in the work area if necessary.
Stop operations if the visibility is poor, such as in mist, snow, rain, or dust.

2 - 17
.

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS SAFETY

PRECAUTIONS ON INDOOR VENTILATION


Exhaust fumes from the engine can kill.
If it is necessary to start the engine within an enclosed area, or
when handling fuel, flushing oil, or paint, open the doors and
windows to ensure that adequate ventilation is provided to
prevent gas poisoning.

CHECKING SIGNALMAN'S SIGNALS AND SIGNS


Set up signs to inform of road shoulders and soft ground. If the visibility is not good, position a signalman if
necessary. Operators should pay careful attention to the signs and follow the instructions from the signalman.
Only one signalman should give signals.
Make sure that all workers understand the meaning of all signals and signs before starting work.

ASBESTOS DUST HAZARD PREVENTION


Asbestos dust in the air can cause lung cancer if it is inhaled. There
is danger of inhaling asbestos when working on jobsites handling
demolition work or work handling industrial waste. Always observe
the following.
Spray water to keep down the dust when cleaning. Do not use
compressed air for cleaning.
If there is danger that there may be asbestos dust in the air,
always operate the machine from an upwind position. All
workers should use an approved respirator.
Do not allow other persons to approach during the operation.
Always observe the rules and regulations for the work site and
environmental standards.
This machine does not use asbestos, but there is a danger that imitation parts may contain asbestos, so always use
genuine Komatsu parts.

2 - 18
.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS DURING OPERATION

PRECAUTIONS DURING OPERATION


BEFORE STARTING ENGINE
If there is a warning tag hanging from gear shift lever (1), do not
start the engine or touch the levers.

CHECKS BEFORE STARTING ENGINE, ADJUST


Carry out the following checks before starting the engine at the beginning of the day's work.
Remove all dirt from the surface of the window glass to ensure a good view.
Remove all dirt from the surface of the lens of the front lamps, working lamps, and rear combination lamp, and
check that they light up correctly.
Check the coolant level, fuel level, and oil level in engine oil pan, check for clogging of the air cleaner, and check
for damage to the electric wiring.
Check that there is no mud or dust accumulated around the movable parts of the accelerator pedal or brake pedal,
and check that the pedals work properly.
Adjust the operator's seat to a position where it is easy to carry out operations, and check that there is no damage
or wear to the seat belt or mounting clamps.
Check the operation of the instruments and gauges, check the angle of the mirror, and check that the control
levers are all at the Neutral position.
Before starting the engine, make sure that the safety lock lever is in the LOCK position.
Adjust the mirrors so that the rear of the machine can be seen clearly from the operator's seat.
Refer to "WALK-AROUND CHECK (PAGE 3-54)".
Check that there are no persons or obstacles above, below, or in the area around the machine.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING ENGINE


Start and operate the machine only while seated.
Do not attempt to start the engine by short-circuiting the engine starting circuit. Such an act may cause a serious
bodily injury or fire.
When starting the engine, sound the horn as a warning.
If another person is allowed on the machine, that person may sit only in the assistant's seat.

2 - 19
.

PRECAUTIONS DURING OPERATION SAFETY

PRECAUTIONS IN COLD AREAS


Carry out the warming-up operation thoroughly. If the machine is not thoroughly warmed up before the control
levers are operated, the reaction of the machine will be slow, and this may lead to unexpected accidents.
If the battery electrolyte is frozen, do not charge the battery or start the engine with a different power source.
There is a hazard that this will ignite the battery and cause the battery to explode.
Before charging or starting the engine with a different power source, melt the battery electrolyte and check that
there is no leakage of electrolyte before starting.
Drain water in the air tank.
If there is no sound of the air being released when the service brake or parking brake are operated, check the air
tank pressure and remove any snow or ice from around the brake valve.

2 - 20
.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS DURING OPERATION

AFTER STARTING ENGINE

CHECKS AFTER STARTING ENGINE


When carrying out the checks, move the machine to a wide area where there are no obstructions, and operate
slowly. Do not allow anyone near the machine.
Always fasten your seat belt.
Check the operation of travel, steering and brake systems, and dump body control system.
Check for any problem in the sound of the machine, vibration, heat, smell, or gauges; check also that there is no
leakage of oil or fuel.
If any problem is found, carry out repairs immediately.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN TRAVELING FORWARD OR REVERSE


Before travelling, check again that there is no one in the
surrounding area, and that there are no obstacles.
Before travelling, sound the horn to warn people in the area.
Always operate the machine only when seated.
Always fasten your seat belt.
If another person is allowed on the machine, that person may sit
only in the assistant's seat.
Check that the backup alarm (backup warning buzzer) works
properly.
Always close the door and the window of the operator's
compartment and check that the door lock is applied.
Always be sure to carry out the above precautions even when the
machine is equipped with mirrors.

2 - 21
.

PRECAUTIONS DURING OPERATION SAFETY

PRECAUTIONS DURING OPERATION


Never turn the key in the starting switch to the OFF position. It is dangerous if the engine stops when the machine
is traveling, because the steering becomes heavy. If the engine stops, depress the brake pedal immediately to
stop the machine.
Lower the dump body, setting the dump lever at FLOAT position, then travel.
To prevent the machine from rolling over when traveling on rough ground, travel at low speed and avoid sudden
changes in direction.
When traveling or carrying out operations, always keep a safe distance from people, structures, or other
machines to avoid coming into contact with them.
When passing over bridges or structures, check first that the structure is strong enough to support the weight of
the machine.
When operating in tunnels, inside buildings, or under bridges or electric wires, or other places where the height
is limited, operate slowly and be extremely careful not to let the machine or dump body contact anything.
Continuous long time traveling at high speed may cause tires to heat up, abnormally increasing the inflation
pressure inside the tires, and to blow up. The explosion of the tire is very destructive, and it can lead to serious
injury or death.
Contact with your Komatsu distributor before doing long continuous traveling.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN TRAVELING ON THE SLOPES


To prevent the machine from tipping over or slipping to the side, always do as follows.
When traveling downhill, use the retarder brake to reduce speed. Do not turn the steering wheel suddenly.
Travel on grass, fallen leaves, or wet steel plates with low speed. Even with slight slopes there is a hazard that
the machine may slip.
If the engine should stop on a slope, apply the brakes fully and apply the parking brake also to stop the machine.
Do not shift the gear while traveling downhill or travel downhill with the transmission in neutral. If this is neglected,
the engine does not work as a brake, and that is dangerous. Be sure to set the transmission in one of the lower
gear speeds. In addition, apply the brake and use the engine as a brake, if necessary.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN OPERATING DUMP BODY


Before starting the dumping operation, check to be sure there is no person or object behind the machine.
Stop the machine in the correct position, and check again that there is no person or object behind the machine.
Give the determined signal, then slowly operate the dump body.
If necessary, use blocks for the wheels or position a flagman.
Do not carry out dumping operations on slopes. The machine stability will become poor and there is the danger
that it could tip over.
Do not travel with the body raised.
Do not leave or return to the operator's seat during loading work.

PRECAUTIONS FOR OPERATION


Do not load the dump body above the maximum payload. The brakes will lose their effect.
When operating in tunnels, or under bridges or electric wires, or in other places where the height is limited,
operate slowly and be extremely careful not to let the dump body contact anything.
To prevent accidents caused by hitting other objects, always operate the machine at a speed which is safe for
operation, particular in confined spaces, indoors, and in places where there are other machines.

METHOD OF USING BRAKES


Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal unless it is necessary.
Do not depress the brake pedal repeatedly if not necessary.
When traveling downhill, use the braking force of the engine, and always use the retardar at the same time.

2 - 22
.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS DURING OPERATION

RECAUTIONS UNDER THE SNOWING AND FREEZING CONDITION


Snow-covered or frozen surfaces are slippery, so be extremely careful when traveling or operating the machine,
and do not operate the levers suddenly. Even a slight slope may cause the machine to slip, so be particularly
careful when working on slopes.
With frozen ground surfaces, the ground becomes soft when the temperature rises, and this may cause the
machine to tip over.
If the machine enters deep snow, there is a hazard that it may tip over or become buried in the snow. Be careful
not to leave the road shoulder or to get trapped in a snow drift.
When traveling on snow-covered roads, always fit tire chains.
When traveling on snow-covered slopes, never apply the foot brake suddenly. Reduce the speed and use the
engine as a brake while applying the foot brake intermittently (depress the brake intermittently several times). If
necessary, lower the bucket to the ground to stop the machine.
When the loaded materials in the dump body are frozen, do not dump. There is a danger that the machine could
tip over.

PRECAUTIONS FOR PARKING


Park the machine on firm, level ground.
Select a place where there is no hazard of falling rocks or
landslides, or of flooding if the land is low.

When leaving the machine, place the gear shift lever (1) at
neutral and set the parking valve lever (2) to the PARKING
position. Then, stop the engine.
Always close the operator's cab door, and use the key to lock all
the equipment in order to prevent any unauthorized person from
moving the machine. Always remove the key, take it with you,
and leave it in the specified place.
If it is necessary to park the machine on a slope, set blocks
under the wheels to prevent the machine from moving.

2 - 23
.

PRECAUTIONS DURING OPERATION SAFETY

BATTERY

BATTERY HAZARD PREVENTION


Battery electrolyte contains sulphuric acid, and batteries generate flammable hydrogen gas, which may explode.
Mistaken handling can lead to serious injury or fire. For this reason, always observe the following precautions.
Do not use or charge the battery if the battery electrolyte level is below the LOWER LEVEL line. This may cause
an explosion. Check the battery electrolyte level periodically and add distilled water to bring the electrolyte level
to the UPPER LEVEL line.
When working with batteries, always wear safety glasses and rubber gloves.
Never smoke or use any flame near the battery.

If you spill acid on your clothes or skin, immediately flush the


area with large amount of water.
If acid gets into your eyes, flush them immediately with large
amount of water and seek medical attention.

Before working with batteries, turn the starting switch to the OFF position.

As there is a hazard that sparks will be generated, always do as follows.


Do not let tools or other metal objects make any contact between the battery terminals. Do not leave tools or other
metal objects lying around near the battery.
Always disconnect the negative (-) terminal (ground side) first when removing the battery; when installing the
battery, connect the positive (+) terminal first, and connect the ground last. Tighten the battery terminals securely.
Flammable hydrogen gas is generated when the battery is charged, so remove the battery from the chassis, take
it to a well-ventilated place, and remove the battery caps before charging it.
Tighten the battery caps securely.
Install the battery securely to the determined place.

2 - 24
.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS DURING OPERATION

STARTING WITH BOOSTER CABLES


If any mistake is made in the method of connecting the booster
cables, it may cause the battery to explode, so always do as
follows.
When starting with a booster cable, carry out the starting
operation with two workers (one worker sitting in the operator's
seat and the other working with the battery).
When starting from another machine, do not allow the two
machines to touch.
When connecting the booster cables, turn the starting switch
OFF position for both the normal machine and problem
machine. There is a hazard that the machine will move when the
power is connected.
Be sure to connect the positive (+) cable first when installing the
booster cables. Disconnect the negative (-) cable (ground side)
first when removing them.
When removing the booster cables, be careful not to let the
booster cable clips touch each other or to let the clips touch the
machine.
Always wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when starting the
engine with booster cables.
When connecting a normal machine to a problem machine with
booster cables, always use a normal machine with the same
battery voltage as the problem machine.
For details of the starting procedure when using booster cables,
see "STARTING ENGINE WITH BOOSTER CABLE (PAGE
3-111)" in the OPERATION section.

2 - 25
.

PRECAUTIONS DURING OPERATION SAFETY

TOWING

WHEN TOWING
When towing or being towed, mistakes in the method of selecting and inspecting the wire rope or drawbar, or in the
method of towing may lead to serious personal injury.
For details of the procedure for towing, see the "METHOD OF TOWING MACHINE (PAGE 3-104)"
Always confirm that the wire rope or drawbar used for towing
has ample strength for the weight of the machine being towed.
Never use a wire rope which has cut strands (A), reduced
diameter (B), or kinks (C). There is danger that the rope may
break during the towing operation.
Always wear leather gloves when handling wire rope.
Never tow a machine on a slope.
During the towing operation, never stand between the towing
machine and the machine being towed.

2 - 26
.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE

PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE


WARNING TAG
Attach the DO NOT OPERATE warning tag to gear shift lever (1)
in the operator's cab during the inspection and maintenance.
Attach additional warning tags around the machine if necessary.
Warning tag Part No. 09963-03001
Keep the warning tag in the tool box when it is not used. If the
tool box is unavailable, keep it in the case for operation manual.
If any person other than the serviceman starts the engine, or
touches or operates the gear shift lever or dump lever while the
serviceman is carrying out service or maintenance of the
machine, it may lead to serious injury.

KEEP WORK PLACE CLEAN AND TIDY


Do not leave hammers or other tools lying around in the work place. Wipe up all grease, oil, or other substances
that will cause you to slip. Always keep the work place clean and tidy to enable you to carry out operations safely.
If the work place is not kept claen and tidy, there is the danger that you will trip, slip, or fall over and injure yourself.

APPOINT LEADER WHEN WORKING WITH OTHERS


When repairing the machine or when removing and installing the attachment, appoint a leader and follow his
instructions during the operation.
When working with others, misunderstandings between workers can lead to serious accidents.

2 - 27
.

PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE SAFETY

STOP ENGINE BEFORE CARRYING OUT INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE


Stop the machine on firm, level ground.
Select a place where there is no hazard of falling rocks or
landslides, or of flooding if the land is low.

Lower the dump body and stop the engine.


Set parking brake valve lever to the PARKING position and put
blocks (1) under the tires to prevent the machine from moving.

2 - 28
.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE

TWO WORKERS FOR MAINTENANCE WHEN ENGINE IS RUNNING


To prevent injury, do not carry out maintenance with the engine
running. If maintenance must be carried out with the engine
running, carry out the operation with at least two workers and do as
follows.
One worker must always sit in the operator's seat and be ready
to stop the engine at any time. All workers must maintain
contact with the other workers.
Lock the dump lever in HOLD position to prevent the operation
cab from moving. Also, set parking brake valve lever to the
PARKING position to prevent the machine from moving.

When carrying out operations near the fan, fan belt, or other rotating parts, there is a hazard of being caught in
the parts, so be careful not to come close.
Do not touch any control levers. If any control lever must be operated, give a signal to the other workers to warn
them to move to a safe place.
Never drop or insert tools or other objects into the fan or fan belt. Parts may break or be sent flying.

PROPER TOOLS
Use only tools suited to the task and be sure to use the tools
correctly. Using damaged, low quality, faulty, makeshift tools or
improper use of the tools could cause serious personal injury.

2 - 29
.

PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE SAFETY

HANDLING SUSPENSION CYLINDER


The suspension cylinder is charged with high-pressure nitrogen gas. If any mistake is made in handling, it may lead
to serious injury. To prevent this, always do as follows.
Do not remove or disassemble the cylinder.
Do not bring it near flame or dispose of it in fire.
Do not make holes in it, weld it, or use a cutting torch.
Do not bear any shock by hammering, rolling or similar activity.
Ask for your Komatsu distributor when sealing gas into the cylinder or releasing gas from it.

PERSONNEL
Only authorized personnel can service and repair the machine. Do not allow unauthorized personnel into the area.
If necessary, employ an observer.

WORK UNDER THE MACHINE


If it is necessary to go under the machine when it is raised in
order to carry out service or maintenance, support the machine
securely with blocks and stands strong enough to support the
weight of the machine.
When carrying out inspection with the dump body raised, always
set the dump lever to the HOLD position, and lock it in position,
then insert the safety pin securely. When you use safety pin, see
"SAFETY PIN (PAGE 3-35)".

NOISE
When carrying out maintenance of the engine and you are exposed to noise for long periods of time, wear ear covers
or ear plugs while working.
If the noise from the machine is too loud, it may cause temporary or permanent hearing problems.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING HAMMER


When using a hammer, pins may fly out or metal particles may be
scattered. This may lead to serious injury. Always do as follows.
If hard metal parts such as pins, and bearings are hit with a
hammer, there is danger that small pieces will fly off; this may
lead to seious injury. Wear protective glasses, hard hat, and
other protective equipment.
If pins are hit with a hammer, there is a hazard that the metal
particles may fly out and injure people in the surrounding area.
Always make sure that no one is in the surrounding area before
using the hummer.
There is a hazard that the pin hit with strong force may fly out
and injure people in the surrounding area.

REPAIR WELDING
Welding operations must always be carried out by a qualified welder and in a place equipped with proper equipment.
There is a hazard of gas, fire, or electrocution when carrying out welding, so never allow any unqualified personnel
to carry out welding.

2 - 30
.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE

REMOVING BATTERY TERMINAL


When repairing the electrical system or when carrying out electrical welding, remove the negative (-) terminal of the
battery to prevent the flow of current.

PRECAUTIONS WITH HIGH-PRESSURE OIL


The hydraulic system is always under internal pressure. When inspecting or replacing piping or hoses, always
check that the pressure in the hydraulic circuit has been released. If the circuit is still under pressure, it will lead to
serious injury, so always do as follows.
For details of the method of releasing the pressure: see the section on "INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT". Do
not carry out any inspection or replacement operation before the pressure has been completely removed.
If there is any leakage from the piping or hoses, the surrounding
area will be wet, so check for cracks in the piping and hoses and
for swelling in the hoses.
When carry out inspection, wear safety glasses and leather
gloves.
There is a hazard that high-pressure oil leaking from small holes
may penetrate your skin or cause blindness if it contacts your
eyes directly. If you are hit by a jet of high-pressure oil and suffer
injury to your skin or eyes, wash the place with clean water, and
consult a doctor immediately for medical attention.

HANDLING HIGH-PRESSURE HOSES, PIPING


If oil or fuel leaks from high-pressure hoses, it may cause fire or defective operation, which may lead to serious
injury. If any loose bolts are found, stop work and tighten to the specified torque. If any damaged hoses are found,
stop operations immediately and contact your Komatsu distributor.
Replace the hose if any of the following problems are found.
Damaged or leaking hydraulic fitting.
Frayed or cut covering or exposed reinforcement wire layer.
Covering swollen in places.
Twisted or crushed movable portion.
Foreign material embedded in covering.

WASTE MATERIALS
To prevent pollution, pay careful attention to the method of disposing of waste materials.
Always put oil drained from your machine in containers. Never
drain oil directly onto the ground or dump into the sewage
system, rivers, the sea, or lakes.
Obey appropriate laws and regulations when disposing of
harmful objects such as oil, fuel, coolant, solvent, filters, and
batteries.

MAINTENANCE OF AIR CONDITIONER


If air conditioner refrigerant gets into your eyes, it may cause blindness; if it touches your skin, it may cause frostbite.
Never touch refrigerant.

2 - 31
.

PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE SAFETY

COMPRESSED AIR
When carrying out cleaning with compressed air, there is a hazard of serious injury caused by flying particles.
When using compressed air to clean elements or the radiator, always wear safety glasses, dust mask, gloves,
and other protective equipment.

PERIODIC REPLACEMENT OF SAFETY-CRITICAL PARTS


In order for the machine to be operated safely for a long time, it is necessary to add oil and to carry out service
and maintenance at periodic intervals. In order to further increase safety, components with a strong relationship
to safety, such as hoses and seat belts, must be replaced at periodic intervals.
Replacement of safety-critical parts: See "PERIODIC REPLACEMENT OF SAFETY CRITICAL PARTS (PAGE
4-13)".
The material of these components naturally changes over time, and repeated use causes deterioration, wear, and
fatigue. As a result, there is a hazard that these components may fail and cause serious injury or death. It is
difficult to judge the remaining life of these components from external inspection or the feeling when operating,
so always replace them at the specified interval.
Replace or repair safety-critical parts if any defect is found, even when they have not reached the time specified
interval.

2 - 32
.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WITH TIRES

PRECAUTIONS WITH TIRES


HANDLING TIRES
If tires or rims are handled mistakenly, there is danger that the tire
may explode or be damaged, or that the rim may fly off and cause
serious injury or death.
To maintain safety, always do as follows.
Maintenance, disassembly, repair, and assembly of the tires
and rims requires special equipment and special technology, so
always ask your Komatsu distributor to carry out these
operations.
Use only the specified tires and inflate them to the specified
pressure.
Suitable inflation pressure: see "SELECTION AND
INSPECTION OF TIRES (PAGE 4-34)".
When pumping up the tires, check that no other person is
standing near the tire, and install an air chuck with a clip that can
be secured to the air valve.
To prevent the tire inflation pressure from becoming too high,
measure the pressure from time to time with an air gauge while
pumping up the tire.
If the tire pressure goes down abnormally or the rim parts do not
fit the tire, there is a problem with the tire or rim parts. Always
contact your Komatsu distributor for repairs.
If the rim parts are not fitted properly when the tire is being pumped up, there is danger that the rim parts may fly
off, so set up a protective fence around the tire, and do not stand directly in front of the rim. Stand beside the tread
when pumping up the tire.
Do not adjust the tire inflation pressure immediately after traveling at high speed or carrying out operations under
heavy load.
Never carry out welding or light a fire near the tire.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STORING TIRE


Tires for construction equipment are extremely heavy, so trying to
hold the tire may lead to serious injury.
As a basic rule, store the tires in a warehouse which
unauthorized persons cannot enter.
If the tires must be stored outside, always erect a fence and put
up "No Entry" signs.
Stand the tire on level ground, and block it securely so that it
cannot roll or fall over if any person should touch it.
Do not lay the tire on its side. This will deform the tire and cause
it to deteriorate.
If the tire should fall over, do not attempt to stop it. Get out of the
way quickly.

2 - 33
.

3-1
.

GENERAL VIEW OPERATION

GENERAL VIEW
GENERAL VIEW OF MACHINE

(1) Dump body (4) Turn signal light


(2) Rear wheel (5) Head lamp
(3) Front wheel

3-2
.

OPERATION GENERAL VIEW

GENERAL VIEW OF CONTROLS AND GAUGES

(1) Safety lock (10) Shift limiter switch


(2) Dump lever (11) Power mode selector switch (if equipped)
(3) Lamp switch, Turn signal lever, Dimmer switch (12) Emergency brake lever
(4) Steering wheel (13) Emergency steering switch
(5) Machine monitor (14) Message display for PMC (if equipped)
(6) Retarder control lever (15) Engine emergency stop switch
(7) Cigarette lighter (16) Accelerator pedal
(8) Shift lever (17) Brake pedal
(9) Parking brake valve lever (18) Differential lock pedal (if equipped)

3-3
.

GENERAL VIEW OPERATION

Enlargement of machine monitor

(1) Caution/pilot lamp bulb check switch (5) Panel dimmer switch
(2) Starting switch (6) Hazard lamp switch
(3) Preheating switch (7) Front brake cut-off switch
(4) AISS LOW switch (8) Exhaust brake switch

3-4
.

OPERATION EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS

EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS
The following is an explanation of devices needed for operating the machine.
To perform suitable operations correctly and safely, it is important to completely understand methods of operating
the equipment, and the meanings of the displays.

MACHINE MONITOR

A: User code display D: Meter display portion


B: Caution items E: Mechatronic caution lamp portion
C: Emergency stop item F: Central warning lamp

NOTICE
When the starting switch is turned to the ON position before the engine is started, all the monitors, gauges, and the central
warning lamp will light up for approx. 3 seconds, and the alarm buzzer will sound for approx. one second. When this happens, the
speedometer will display 88.
If no monitor lamp lights up, then there is probably a failure or disconnection in that circuit, therefore contact your Komatsu
distributor to have the circuit checked.
When the starting switch is at the ON position, if the shift lever is not at the neutral position, then the transmission shift lever
position pilot lamp (1) and the central warning lamp will flash and the alarm buzzer will continue to sound intermittently. At this
time, when the lever is placed in neutral, letter N is displayed, the central warning lamp goes out and the buzzer stops.

Checking for blown caution lamp or pilot lamp bulbs


Turn the starting switch to the ON position before starting the engine, press bulb check switch (2) and check that
no caution lamp or pilot lamp bulbs are blown.
If any lamp does not light up, the bulb is probably blown, so replace the bulb.
If the lamp does not light up even when the bulb is replaced, there is probably a failure or disconnection, so please
contact your Komatsu distributor to have the circuit checked.

3-5
.

EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS OPERATION

USER CODE DISPLAY


If any failure occurred on the machine or if the operation needs to be changed or if checks and maintenance are
required, the user code display (1) shows the user code indicating appropriate corrective action. At this time, the
monitor related to the abnormal area lights up or flashes, and the central warning light flashes.

(1) User code display

WARNING
If user code 02 or 04 is displayed, stop the machine immediately. See "SERVICE CODE (PAGE 3-118)", and check the service code
number. Contact Komatsu distributor, telling them the service code number, for repair.

If letter "E-" and any user code of "01 to 07" is displayed in turn at the upper right of the liquid crystal display on the
monitor panel, stop the machine once. Then, take the corrective action as follows after checking user code (1).
User code
02: Park the machine at a safe location and contact your Komatsu distributor.
04: Carry out an emergency stop. Stop the engine and contact your Komatsu distributor.
01: Carry out checks and maintenance according to the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
03: Operate the machine keeping the engine at low revolution and low travel speed.
05: Stop the machine. Run the engine at a mid-range speed under no load.
06: Restart the engine. Idle the engine for a while.
07: Do not raise the dump body.

If the user code is displayed again even after taking the corrective action shown above when the user code 01,
03, 05, 06, or 07 is displayed, check the sevice code.

3-6
.

OPERATION EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS

CAUTION ITEMS
CAUTION
If any of the warning monitors lights up, carry out the inspection and maintenance of the appropriate item as soon as possible.
If it is left without the inspection and maintenance, it will lead to the trouble or failure.

If there is any abnormallity for the caution items, the monitor for the corresponding abnormal area lights up.

(1) Battery charge (5) Transmission filter clogging


(2) Emergency steering (6) Fuel level
(3) Parking brake (7) Maintenance caution lamp (if equipped)
(4) Dump body actuation caution

BATTERY CHARGE
This (1) notifies the operator of any abnormality in the charging
system when the engine is running. If it lights up and
simultaneously displays user code 01, check the charging circuit.

3-7
.

EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS OPERATION

EMERGENCY STEERING
This (2) lights up when the emergency steering is actuated.
If any abnormality should occur in the steering oil pressure circuit
when the machine is traveling, the auto emergency steering is
actuated and the related lamp lights up.

PARKING BRAKE
This (3) lights up when the parking brake is applied.
It goes on and out respectively responding to the parking brake
lever shifting of PARK/TRAVEL.

DUMP BODY ACTUATION CAUTION


This monitor (4) lights up when the dump body control lever is at
any position other than FLOAT or when the body is lifted. Always
set the lever to the FLOAT position and lower the body during
traveling.

TRANSMISSION FILTER CLOGGING


This monitor (5) notifies the operator that the transmission filter is
clogged. If it lights up and displays action code 01 at the same time,
replace the transmission filter.

3-8
.

OPERATION EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS

FUEL LEVEL
This monitor (6) flashes when the level of the fuel in the fuel tank
goes below 170 liters (44.88 US gal).
If it flashes, check the fuel level and add fuel.

MAINTENANCE CAUTION LAMP


(If equipped)
If the machine is in any of the following conditions, this lamp will
light up.
If it lights up and displays user code 01 at the same time, carry out
check, replenishment or replacement.

Insufficient oil in the front brake oil tank


Insufficient oil in the transmission case
Insufficient oil in the hydraulic oil tank
Clogging of the transmission filter (on the tank side)
Clogging of the full flow filter (the engine oil filter)
Clogging of the hydraulic oil filter
Wear of the rear brake disc (right hand)
Wear of the rear brake disc (left hand)
Drop of the battery electrolyte level
Insufficient oil in the engine oil pan
Clogging of the air cleaner

3-9
.

EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS OPERATION

EMERGENCY STOP ITEM


CAUTION
If any of these monitor lights up or flashes, stop the engine immediately or put the engine in low idling, then check the
corresponding area and carry out the action.

If the abonormaliy is found in the emergency items, the waring buzzer sounds and the monitor corresponds to the
abnormal section lights up or flashes, and the central warning light flashes.

(1) Air pressure (6) Engine oil pressure


(2) Engine water temperature (7) Angle warning
(3) Torque converter oil temperature (8) Rear brake caution lamp
(4) Retarder oil temperature (9) Steering oil temperature
(5) Radiator water level

AIR PRESSURE
This monitor (1) warns the operator that the air pressure inside the
air tank has dropped. If it flashes and displays the user code "05"
at the same time, stop the machine, run the engine under no load
at a mid-range speed, and wait until the lamp goes out.

3 - 10
.

OPERATION EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS

ENGINE WATER TEMPERATURE


This (2) warns the operator that the engine cooling water
temperature has risen.
For the machine equipped with an electronic governor (if
equipped), the engine output is automatically limited.
If it flashes and displays user code 05 at the same time, stop the
machine and run the engine under no load at a mid-range speed
until the engine water temperature gauge enters the green range.

TORQUE CONVERTER OIL TEMPERATURE


This monitor (3) warns the operator that the torque converter oil
temperature has risen.
If it flashes and displays user code "05" at the same time, stop the
machine and run the engine under no load at a mid-range speed
until the torque converter oil temperature gauges enters the green
range.

RETARDER OIL TEMPERATURE


This monitor (4) warns the operator that the retarder oil
temperature has risen.
If it flashes and displays user code "05" at the same time, stop the
machine, place the shift lever at the N (neutral) position, then run
the engine under no load at a mid-range speed until the warning
lamp goes out.

RADIATOR WATER LEVEL


This (5) warns the operator that the radiator water level has
dropped.
If it lights up and displays user code 01 at the same time, stop the
engine, check the level of the cooling water in the radiator, and add
the water.

3 - 11
.

EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS OPERATION

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE


This (6) warns the operator that the engine lubricating oil pressure
has dropped.
If it lights up and displays user code 04 at the same time, stop the
machine safely. Then, stop the engine and carry out inspection.

The lamp lights up if the engine lubricating oil pressure goes below
the specified value when the engine is running,
If the engine is not running, the lamp does not light up.

ANGLE WARNING
When the dump body is raised, this monitor (7) warns the operator
that the machine has tilted beyond the safety range to the left or
right.
If it lights up and displays action code "07" at the same time, lower
the body and move the machine to a safe, stable place.

REAR BRAKE CAUTION LAMP


This monitor (8) lights up if the brake oil pressure drops under the
normal value.
If it lights up and display user code "04" at the same time,
immediately check the rear brake system.
After checking and repairing, depress the rod for the overstroke
sensor on the brake chamber.
If depressing is not carried out, the rear brake caution lamp will
continue to light up.

STEERING OIL TEMPERATURE


This monitor (9) warns the operator that the steering oil
temperature has risen.
If it lights up and displays user code "05" at the same time, stop the
machine, place the shift lever at the N (neutral) position, then run
the engine under no load at a mid-range speed until the warning
lamp goes out.

3 - 12
.

OPERATION EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS

METER DISPLAY PORTION

PILOT DISPLAY PORTION


When starting switch is ON, the pilot display lights up when display items are functioning.

(1) Preheating monitor (7) High beam


(2) Exhaust brake pilot (8) Turn signal pilot lamp
(3) Rear brake pilot (retarder) (9) Shift indicator (with lockup display)
(4) Differential lock pilot (if equipped) (10) Transmission shift lever position pilot lamp
(5) Lockup pilot lamp (11) Auto suspension mode display lamp
(6) Shift limiter pilot lamp (12) Power mode display lamp (if equipped)

PREHEATING MONITOR
This lamp lights up when the electrical heater for preheating the
engine is being actuated.

3 - 13
.

EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS OPERATION

EXHAUST BRAKE PILOT


This pilot lamp (2) lights up when the exhaust brake is actuated.

REAR BRAKE PILOT (Retarder)


This pilot lamp (3) lights up when the foot brake is depressed or the
retarder control lever is pulled, and the rear brake is applied.

DIFFERENTIAL LOCK PILOT


(If equipped)
This pilot lamp (4) lights up when the differential lock pedal (if
equipped) is depressed and the differential lock is actuated.

LOCKUP PILOT LAMP


This pilot lamp (5) lights up when the torque converter lockup is
engaged and the transmission is shifted to direct drive.

3 - 14
.

OPERATION EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS

SHIFT LIMITER PILOT LAMP


This pilot lamp (6) lights up when the shift limiter switch is actuated.

HIGH BEAM
This monitor (7) lights up when the head lamps are set to high
beam.

TURN SIGNAL PILOT LAMP


This pilot lamp (8) flashes at the same time as the turn signal lamp
flashes.

SHIFT INDICATOR
This monitor (9) displays the transmission shift range (speed
range).
When the key was turned ON, if the shift lever is operated, it will
display "2" at the lever position "D", "1" at the "5" - "L" position, and
"R" at the R position even if the engine is stopped.

3 - 15
.

EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS OPERATION

TRANSMISSION SHIFT LEVER POSITION PILOT LAMP


This monitor (10) indicates the position of the transmission shift
lever.

AUTO SUSPENSION MODE DISPLAY LAMP


This monitor (11) displays the suspension mode, when the
machine is equipped with the suspension controller.
An automatic suspension system is mounted which automatically
switches the damping characteristics of the suspension according
to the size of the load, use of the brake, operation of the steering,
and operation of the dump control.
Normally it is set to the soft mode when the dump truck is traveling
empty and to the medium mode when it is traveling loaded. When
the foot brake is operated or the machine is suddenly turned, or the
dump control is operated, the suspension mode is switched to
insure the stability of the machine to the front and rear, and left and
right.

H : Hard mode
M : Medium mode
S : Soft mode

POWER MODE DISPLAY LAMP


(If equipped)
This monitor (12) displays the power mode.
Select the mode with the power mode switch.

3 - 16
.

OPERATION EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS

METERS

(1) Speedometer (6) Air pressure gauge


(2) Engine tachometer (7) Engine water temperature gauge
(3) Service meter (8) Torque converter oil temperature gauge
(4) Odometer (9) Retarder oil temperature gauge
(5) Fuel gauge

SPEEDOMETER
This meter (1) indicates the travel speed of the machine.

3 - 17
.

EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS OPERATION

ENGINE TACHOMETER
This meter (2) indicates the speed of the engine.
While operating the machine, if the red range lights up,
simultaneously the warning buzzer sounds and the central warning
lamp flashes, then operate the machine while lowering the engine
speed and the traveling speed.

SERVICE METER
This meter (3) shows the total hours of operation of the machine.
If the engine is running, the service meter will advance even if the
machine is not moving.
The meter advances by 1 for every one hour of operation,
regardless of the engine speed.

ODOMETER
This (4) indicates the distance traveled in kilometers.

FUEL GAUGE
This gauge (5) indicates the amount of fuel in the fuel tank.
The green range should be lighted up during operation.
If only the red range remains lighted during operation, it indicates
that there is less than 120 liters (31.68 US gal) of fuel remaining in
the tank, so check and add fuel.

3 - 18
.

OPERATION EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS

AIR PRESSURE GAUGE


This gauge (6) indicates the air pressure inside the air tank.
The green range should be lit up during operation.
If the red range lights up during operation, the alarm buzzer will
sound, the central warning lamp will flash, and the air pressure
monitor lamp will also flash at the same time.
If this happens, stop the machine, raise the engine speed, and wait
until the green range lights up.

REMARK
If the air pressure drops further, the parking brake is automatically
applied.

ENGINE WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE


This gauge (7) indicates the engine cooling water temperature.
The green range should be lighted up during operation.
If the red range lights up during operation, the alarm buzzer will
sound, the central warning lamp will flash, and the engine water
temperature monitor lamp will flash at the same time.
If this happens, stop the machine, run the engine under no load at
a mid-range speed, and wait until the green range lights up.
If the red range lights up, the engine output of the machine
equipped with an electronic governor is automatically limited.

TORQUE CONVERTER OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE


This gauge (8) indicates the torque converter oil temperature.
The green range should be lit up during operation.
If the red range lights up during operation, the alarm buzzer will
sound, the central warning lamp will flash, and the torque converter
oil temperature monitor lamp will flash at the same time. If this
happens, stop the machine, run the engine under no load at a
mid-range speed, and wait until the green range lights up.

RETARDER OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE


This gauge (9) indicates the retarder cooling oil temperature.
The green range should be lit up during operation.
If the red range lights up during operation, the alarm buzzer will
sound, the central warning lamp will flash, and the retarder oil
temperature monitor lamp will flash at the same time. If this
happens, stop the machine, run the engine under no load at a
mid-range speed, and wait until the green range lights up.

3 - 19
.

EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS OPERATION

MECHATRONIC CAUTION LAMP PORTION


If an abnormality is detected in the mechatronics-related parts of the control system, the monitor lamp and the
central warning lamp light up and the alarm buzzer sounds intermittently. Stop the machine, then take appropriate
corrective action according to the user code.

(1) Engine (Mechatronics-related) (3) Mechatronics-related parts


(2) Automatic transmission (Mechatronics-related) (Excluding 1. and 2. above)

ENGINE
(Mechatronics-related)
If an abnormality is detected in the mechatronics-related parts of
the engine control system, this lamp (1) flashes to warn of the
abnormality.

3 - 20
.

OPERATION EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
(Mechatronics-related)
If an abnormality is detected in the mechatronics- related parts of
the transmission control system, this lamp (2) flashes to warn of
the abnormality.

MECHATRONICS-RELATED PARTS
(Excluding 1. and 2. above)
If an abnormality is detected in the mechatronics-related parts of
the control system other than those of the engine and
transmission, this lamp (3) flashes to warn of the abnormality.

CENTRAL WARNING LAMP


If the machine is in the following condition, this lamp will flash.
When an abnormality has occurred in any of B caution items.
When the abnormalities has occurred refered to "CAUTION
ITEMS (PAGE 3-7)".

If the machine is in the following condition, this lamp will flash, and
at the same time, the alarm buzzer will sound intermittently.
When an abnormality has occurred in any of "EMERGENCY
STOP ITEM (PAGE 3-10)".
When "MECHATRONIC CAUTION LAMP PORTION (PAGE
3-20)" flashes.
If the parking brake is applied, but the shift lever is not at neutral.
When the dump lever is not at the FLOAT position and the shift lever is not at neutral.
When engine tachometer red range lights up.

3 - 21
.

EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS OPERATION

SWITCHES

(1) Starting switch (10) Power mode selector switch


(2) Lamp switch (11) Emergency steering switch
Turn signal lever (12) Emergency brake lever
Dimmer switch (13) Shift limiter switch
(3) Caution/pilot lamp bulb check switch (14) Parking brake valve lever
(4) Exhaust brake switch (15) Engine emergency stop switch
(5) Front brake cut-off switch (16) Cigarette lighter
(6) Hazard lamp switch (17) Horn button
(7) Night lighting dimmer switch (18) Wiper switch
(8) AISS LOW switch (19) Room lamp switch
(9) Preheating switch

3 - 22
.

OPERATION EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS

STARTING SWITCH
This switch (1) is used to start or stop the engine.

OFF position
At this position, the starting switch key can be inserted or removed.
When the key is turned to this position, all the electric circuits are
switched off and the engine stops.

ON position
In this position, electric current flows in the charging and lamp
circuits.
Keep the starting switch key at the ON position while the engine is
running.
When turning the starting switch ON or OFF, if the starting switch is held at a position between ON and OFF, the
controller may detect this as a problem. If this happens, return the starting switch to the OFF position, then operate
it as usual to the ON position.

START position
This is the position to start the engine. Hold the key at this position while cranking. Release the key immediately
after the engine has been started. The key will return to the ON position when released.

LAMP SWITCH
This (2) lights up the head lamps, side clearance lamps, tail lamps,
machine monitor lighting, and rear lamps.
(a) position: OFF
(b) position: Side clearance lamps, tail lamps, rear lamps, machine
monitor lighting light up
(c) position: The head lamps light up in addition to the lamps in the
(b) position
The lamp switch can be operated regardless of the position of the
lever.

TURN SIGNAL LEVER


This lever (2) operates the turn signal lamp.
(a)Right turn: Push the lever forward
(b)Left turn: Push the lever back
When the lever is operated, the turn signal pilot lamp also flashes.
The lever is automatically returned when the steering wheel is
turned back. If the lever does not return, move it by hand.

3 - 23
.

EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS OPERATION

DIMMER SWITCH
This (2) is used to switch the head lamps between high beam and
low beam.
(a) Low beam
(b) High beam

CAUTION/PILOT LAMP BULB CHECK SWITCH


Press this switch (3) when the starting switch is at the ON position
to check for any blown bulbs.

EXHAUST BRAKE SWITCH


This switch (4) shows the operating condition of the exhaust brake.
If it is pushed once, it lights up; and it goes off when it is pushed
again.
OFF position (Light is off):
The exhaust brake is actuated when the brake pedal is depressed
or the retarder control lever is operated if the torque converter is in
the lockup condition.
ON position (Light is on):
The exhaust brake is actuated when the accelerator pedal is
released if the torque converter is in the lockup condition.

3 - 24
.

OPERATION EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS

FRONT BRAKE CUT-OFF SWITCH

WARNING
When traveling on icy roads, on snow, or on other slippery road surfaces, set the front brake cut-off switch to the ON position
and travel slowly at a safe speed.
If the front brake cut-off switch is set to the OFF position, it becomes dangerously difficult to control the steering when
traveling under the abovementioned conditions.

This switch (5) switches the braking method according to the road
surface conditions.
If the switch is pressed, the lamp lights up, the front brake cut
function is actuated, and the brakes are not applied to the front
wheels.
If the switch is pressed again, the lamp goes out and the front
brake cut function is canceled.

OFF position (Light is off.):


When the brake pedal is depressed, the brakes are applied to both
the front and rear wheels.
ON position (Light is on.):
When the brake pedal is depressed, the front brakes are not
applied. The brakes are applied only to the rear wheels.

When traveling at high speed, on a road surface that has been properly watered, set the front brake cut-off switch
to OFF position (lamp off), and normally use the retarder control lever to control the travel speed (retarder braking
is applied only to the rear wheels).
To control the machine whenever emergency action is needed, such as when the machine slips to the side or when
the machine has to be stopped suddenly, use the brake pedal to operate the brakes on the front wheels to give extra
braking force.

HAZARD LAMP SWITCH


This switch (6) flashes the left- and right-hand turn signal lamps.
When the switch is turned on, the turn signal pilot lamp flashes at
the same time. If the starting switch is OFF, the turn signal pilot
lamp does not flash.

3 - 25
.

EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS OPERATION

NIGHT LIGHTING DIMMER SWITCH


This switch (7) is used to adjust the brightness of the monitor panel
lighting and pilot lamps. Turn to the right to make the lighting
brighter and turn it to the left to make the lighting dimmer.

AISS LOW SWITCH


AUTO and LOW speed can be freely switched to each other with
AISS LOW switch (8). Use each position as follows.
If the switch is depressed, it lights up, and if it is depressed once
again, the light goes off.
OFF position (Light is off): AUTO position
At normal operation
ON position (Light is on): Low speed position
When the delicate start and operation is
needed like putting the machine into
garage

If the switch is at AUTO position:


1. When stopping the machine, by setting either parking brake or retarder brake at ON position, idling is set at low
speed. When starting, by setting the parking brake at OFF position, idling is set at high speed.
2. Detecting the water temperature, idle is set at high speed automatically under the low temperature condition,
and the warm-up time is shortened.

PREHEATING SWITCH
This switch (9) operate an electric heater to heat the intake air for
the engine. If it is pushed, it lights up and perform preheating. If it
is released, it returns to the original position.

OFF position (Light is off): If the ambient temperature is below


approx. - 5°C (23°F), preheating is
carried out automatically according to
the ambient temperature.

ON position (Light is on): Preheating is carried out.

Press this switch if the engine does not start when only automatic
preheating is carried out or when post-heating is required after the
engine is started.
When the switch is released, it will return automatically to the
automatic preheating position.

3 - 26
.

OPERATION EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS

POWER MODE SELECTOR SWITCH


The power mode switch (10) can be switched to allow the machine
to travel economically in a way suited to the operating conditions.
If depressed once, it lights up; if depressed once again, the light
goes off.
OFF position: High power (general operations)
This is used for general operating conditions.
ON position: economy (traveling in flat areas)
This position is used when the emphasis is on
reducing fuel consumption, such as when traveling
on flat ground where maximum output is not needed.

EMERGENCY STEERING SWITCH


This switch (11) is used to actuate the emergency steering pump.
When the switch is pressed, the emergency pump is actuated to
make it possible to operate the steering.
When the switch is ON, the pilot lamp (red) inside the switch lights
up.
The emergency steering pump can be used for a maximum of 90
seconds.
When using the emergency steering, travel at a speed of less than
5 km/h (3.1 MPH).
When the emergency steering is actuated, it is possible to use the
dump lever to raise the dump body.

Automatic emergency steering will be actuated automatically in the following cases:


When hydraulic pump for steering has trouble
When engine has stopped during operation
When the automatic emergency steering is actuated, stop the machine promptly and perform inspection.

If the key switch is turned ON when the machine is stopped and the parking brake switch is OFF, the auto
emergency steering is actuated after 1 second, so turn the parking brake switch to the ON (PARKING) position.

EMERGENCY BRAKE LEVER


This lever (12) is used to actuate the emergency brake.
ON (applied): Emergency brake actuated
TRAVEL: Emergency brake released

If the pressure in the air tank drops below 0.22 MPa (2.2 kgf/cm2,
31.24 PSI), the emergency brake is automatically applied.
If the emergency brake is applied because of a failure in the air
system, the central warning lamp flashes and the alarm buzzer
sounds.
For details of releasing the brake when the emergency brake has
been applied because of a failure in the air system, see "RELEASE
METHOD WHEN PARKING BRAKE AND EMERGENCY BRAKE
HAVE BEEN ACTUATED IN EMERGENCY (PAGE 3-107)"

3 - 27
.

EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS OPERATION

SHIFT LIMITER SWITCH


This switch (13) is used to limit the maximum speed range when
the transmission shift lever is in the D or L range. If the switch is
depressed, it lights up, and the shifit limiter function get actuated;
consequently the maximum speed for D range is limited to F6, and
the speed for L range is limited to F1 only. If the switch is
depressed again, the light goes away.
Light-off position: D range F2 - F7
L range F1 - F2
Light-on position: D range F2 - F6
L range F1

PARKING BRAKE VALVE LEVER

WARNING
When parking or leaving the machine, always apply the parking brake.
During loading operations, do not apply the parking brake. Pull the retarder lever to apply the brake.

This lever (14) is used to actuate the parking brake valve.


PARKING: Parking brake actuated
TRAVEL: Parking brake is released.
When the lever is set to the PARKING position, the parking brake
pilot lamp lights up.
When the lever is set to the PARKING position, if the gear shift
lever is at any position other than N, the central warning lamp will
flash and the alarm buzzer will sound.

If the air pressure drops and goes below 0.22MPa(2.2kgf/cm2, 31.24PSI), the emergency brake and parking brake
are automatically applied.
For details of releasing the brake when the emergency brake has been applied because of a failure in the air system,
see "RELEASE METHOD WHEN PARKING BRAKE AND EMERGENCY BRAKE HAVE BEEN ACTUATED IN
EMERGENCY (PAGE 3-107)"

ENGINE EMERGENCY STOP SWITCH


NOTICE
This switch must not be used for stopping the engine under normal
conditions. When the engine has completely stopped, return the switch to
the ON (TRAVEL) position.

Use this switch (15) if the engine will not stop even when the
starting switch is turned to the OFF position.

3 - 28
.

OPERATION EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS

CIGARETTE LIGHTER
This (16) is used to light cigarettes.
When the cigarette lighter is pushed in, it will return to its original
position after several seconds, so pull it out and use it to light your
cigarette.

HORN BUTTON
When the horn button (17) in the center of the steering wheel is
pressed, the horn will sound.

WIPER SWITCH
This switch (18) is used to operate the wiper.
INT position: Wiper moves intermittently
OFF
LOW position: Wiper moves at low speed
HI position: Wiper moves at high speed
When the switch is pressed, washer fluid is sprayed out.

ROOM LAMP SWITCH


This (19) is used to switch the room lamp on or off.
(a) OFF
(b) ON

3 - 29
.

EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS OPERATION

CONTROL LEVERS AND PEDALS

(1) Brake pedal (5) Dump lever


(2) Accelerator pedal (6) Retarder control lever
(3) Shift lever (7) Differential lock pedal (if equipped)
(4) Safety lock

BRAKE PEDAL
This pedal (1) is used to apply the wheel brakes.

3 - 30
.

OPERATION EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS

ACCELERATOR PEDAL
This pedal (2) is used to adjust the engine speed.
It can control freely the engine between the low idle and the full
throttle.

GEAR SHIFT LEVER


The gear range can be selected with this lever (3) to match the
travel conditions.

D position:
This is used for normal travel.
If the lever is placed in this position, the transmission is shifted
automatically from 2nd (torque converter drive) to 7th (direct drive)
to match the travel speed of the machine.
If the dump body is raised, the speed range is fixed at 2nd when the
shift lever is at D position. Always lower the dump body when
traveling.
The maximum speed in D position is 65 km/h (40.4 MPH).

R position:
This is used when traveling in reverse.
This position uses the torque converter drive.
The machine cannot travel in reverse if the dump lever is not at the FLOAT position. Set the dump lever to the
FLOAT position before moving the shift lever to the R position.

5 - L position:
These positions are used in places where it is difficult to travel at high speed, or when traveling on soft ground, or
when starting the machine off on a slope when it is loaded. They are also used when going downhill if it is needed
to use the braking force of the engine.

The speed ranges for each position are as follows.

Position Speed range Max. speed (km/h (MPH))


5 1st torque converter - 5th direct 36 (22.4)
4 1st torque converter - 4th direct 27 (16.8)
3 1st torque converter - 3rd direct 20 (12.4)
L 1st torque converter - 2nd direct 15 (9.3)

If the dump body is raised, it is impossible to shift up from 1st. Always lower the dump body when traveling.

When operating the shift lever, be sure to set it in position securely.


If the lever is not placed in position properly, the shift position display on the panel may go out and the transmission
warning monitor lamp may light up.

3 - 31
.

EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS OPERATION

Before shifting between forward and reverse, stop the machine completely and then run the engine at low idle.
When starting the engine, if the gear shift lever is not at the N position, the engine will not start.
When the starting switch is turned to the ON position, if the shift lever is not at the N (neutral) position, the
transmission shift lever position pilot lamp and the central warning lamp will flash and the alarm buzzer will sound.

If shift lever is not at N (neutral) position when the parking brake is applied, the central warning lamp will flash and
the alarm buzzer will sound.

When the dump lever is not at the FLOAT position and when the dump body has risen, if the shift lever is not at the
N (neutral) position, the central warning lamp will flash and the alarm buzzer will sound.

The shift lever must not be returned to the N (neutral) position while traveling.

Release the accelerator pedal and run the engine at low idle when moving the shift lever from the N (neutral) position
to the forward or reverse position.

When moving the gear shift lever from the N (neutral) position to the R (reverse) position or from the D positions to
position 5 (or other lower position), press the lock button on the gear shift lever before moving it.

SAFETY LOCK

WARNING
When raising the dump body to inspect the machine, always place the dump lever at the HOLD position, apply the lock, and then
use the safety pins.

This device (4) is used to lock the dump lever.

3 - 32
.

OPERATION EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS

DUMP LEVER

WARNING
To prevent damage to the dump body through vibration from the road surface, always lower the dump body and set at FLOAT
position before traveling.

This lever (5) is used to operate the dump body.


(a) RAISE
(b) HOLD: The dump body stops and is held in position.
(c) FLOAT: The dump body moves freely under external force.
(d) LOWER
For details, see "DUMP OPERATIONS (PAGE 3-88)".

RETARDER CONTROL LEVER

CAUTION
The retarder must not be used as a parking brake.

This lever (6) is used to operate the retarder, which applies the rear
wheel brake when going downhill.
The more the lever is pulled, the greater the braking force
becomes.
When the retarder is actuated, the rear brake pilot lamp lights up.

For details, see "TRAVELING DOWNHILL (PAGE 3-81)". When


leaving the operator's seat, always apply the parking brake.

DIFFERENTIAL LOCK PEDAL


(If equipped)
This pedal (7) is used to actuate the differential lock control.
When the pedal is depressed, the differential lock is actuated, and
when it is released, the differential lock is canceled.
See "USING DIFFERENTIAL LOCK (PAGE 6-21)" for the details.

3 - 33
.

EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS OPERATION

MECHATRONICS EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER

(1) Transmission controller (3) Suspension controller


(2) Engine controller

TRANSMISSION CONTROLLER
A two-digit number followed by the service code is displayed in the inspection window of this controller (1) to identify
the location of the abnormality. When the condition is normal, "0.0" or "0.C" is displayed.

For the mothod of checking the service code when an abnormality occurs, see "TRANSMISSION CONTROLLER
(PAGE 3-119)".

ENGINE CONTROLLER
For this controller (2), the last two-digit number of the service code is displayed in the inspection window to identify
the location of the abnormality. When the condition is normal, "0.0" is displayed.
For the method to check the service code when the abnormality occurs, see "SERVICE CODE (PAGE 3-118)".

SUSPENSION CONTROLLER
For this controller (3), the last two-digit number of the service code is displayed in the inspection window to identify
the location of the abnormality. When the condition is normal, "0.0" is displayed.
For the method to check the service code when the abnormality occurs, see "SERVICE CODE (PAGE 3-118)".

3 - 34
.

OPERATION EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS

SAFETY PIN
WARNING
When raising the dump body to inspect the machine, always place the dump lever at the HOLD position, apply the lock, and then
use the safety pins.

This is a safety device for the dump body, and is used when
carrying out inspection or maintenance with the dump body raised.
Raise the dump body fully, insert safety pins (1). Always insert the
safety pins on both sides.

STOWING SAFETY PIN


Safety pins (1) are stowed in the towing bracket of the rear axle
housing.

DUST INDICATOR
This device indicates clogging of the air cleaner element.
When red piston (1) appears in the transparent part of this
indicator, the element is clogged. Immediately clean the element.
After cleaning, push indicator button (2) to return the red piston to
the original position.

3 - 35
.

EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS OPERATION

FUSES
WARNING
When replacing any fuse, always turn the power off (turn the starting switch to OFF).
When replacing the fuse, always use a fuse of the same capacity and type.

The fuses protect the electrical equipment and wiring from burning
out.
If the fuse becomes corroded, or white powder can be seen, or the
fuse is loose in the fuse holder, replace the fuse.

FUSE CAPACITY AND CIRCUIT NAME

Fuse box I

Fuse
No. Circuit name
capacity
1 10A Car radio, car stereo
2 10A Horn switch
3 10A Cigarette lighter
4 20A Turn signal indicator lamp, fog lamp (if equipped)
5 10A Engine start relay, neutral relay
6 20A Head lamp (low beam), stop lamp, room lamp
Head lamp (high beam), side clearance lamp,
7 20A
tail lamp, night lighting
8 10A Backup lamp, backup buzzer
Ribon heater relay, front brake cut-off solenoid,
9 10A
BCV relay solenoid
Overrun prevention solenoid, transmission
10 10A
controller, exhaust brake solenoid

3 - 36
.

OPERATION EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS

Fuse box II

Fuse
No. Circuit name
capacity
11 10A Engine controller, governor cut relay
Electronic display panel, caution pilot lamp,
12 10A central warning lamp, buzzer, PMC (if equipped),
MOM( if equipped)
Suspension control solenoid,
13 5A
suspension controller
Payload meter (if equipped),
14 5A
payload relay (if equipped)
15 20A Payload external display lamp (if equipped)
16 5A PMC (if equipped)
Start switch, radio back-up, emergency engine
17 10A stop solenoid (if equipped electronic governor),
engine stop motor
T/M controller, engine controller (if equipped),
18 10A
PMC (if equipped)
19 10A Emergency steering
20 10A Direct from battery (spare)

Fuse box III

Fuse
No. Circuit name
capacity
21 10A AISS motor
22 20A Wiper motor, washer motor
23 20A Air conditioner blower motor
24 10A Air conditioner compressor
25 10A Spare
26 10A Spare

3 - 37
.

EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS OPERATION

CAR STEREO
(If equipped)

EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS

(1) Power switch/Volume (8) Cassette door


(2) Auto-store/Preset scan button (9) Fast forward, rewind buttons
(3) Bass control knob (10) Preset buttons
(4) Treble control knob (11) Metal tape button
(5) Loudness button (12) Manual tuning buttons
(6) Time/Radio display selector button (13) Seek tuning buttons
(7) Tape eject button (14) Band selector button

(A) Band display (E) Tape direction display


(B) Metal tape display (F) Preset channel display
(C) FM stereo reception display (G) Time/Frequency display
(D) Loudness display

3 - 38
.

OPERATION EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS

POWER SWITCH/VOLUME
Turn this knob (1) to the right until it clicks to turn the power on.
Turn it further to increase the volume.

AUTO-STORE/PRESET SCAN BUTTON


Use this button (2) to actuate the preset scan and auto-store
functions.
Auto-store
Each time this button is pressed for more than 2 seconds while
in radio reception, this auto-store function automatically starts to
search for the desired station within a receivable band, and
memorize the frequency in the preset memory. During this
scanning process, the frequency shown in the right side of
display continues to change. This indicates that each frequency
is memorized in the auto-store.

REMARK
The auto-store function cannot be used when the channel display
is flashing.
When the display is flashing, the preset scan function is being
used.

Preset scan
If this button is pressed for less than 0.5 second while in radio reception, programs from the six preset stations
in the same band will be broadcast one after another for 5 seconds each, starting from No. 1 through No. 6
stations consecutively.
When the desired station is found, press the button again. This stops the preset scan tuning process and switches
to ordinary broadcasting. The same process will be repeated continuously until the button is pressed again.

BASS CONTROL KNOB


Turn this button (3) to the left to reduce the low tones; turn it to the
right to emphasize the low tones.
Direction (a): Low tone reduced
Direction (b): Low tone emphasized

3 - 39
.

EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS OPERATION

TREBLE CONTROL KNOB


Turn this button (4) to the left to reduce the low tones; turn it to the
right to emphasize the high tones.
Direction (a): High tone reduced
Direction (b): High tone emphasized

LOUDNESS BUTTON
This button (5) is used when playing at low volume. It makes it
possible to hear more easily by emphasizing the low tone when the
low tones are weak.
Push button: Actuated (ON)
Push button again: Canceled (OFF)

TIME/RADIO DISPLAY SELECTOR BUTTON


This button (6) is used to switch between the "Radio/tape display"
and the "Time display".

Correcting the time


Press the button to set the time display.
(A) Correcting hour:
Keep the DISP button pressed and press the bottom (H) of
the TUNING button to correct the hour.
(B) Correcting minute:
Keep the DISP button pressed and press the top (M) of the
TUNING button to correct the minute.

3 - 40
.

OPERATION EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS

TAPE EJECT BUTTON


This button (7) is used to stop the tape and to eject the cassette.
When this button is pressed, the tape is ejected and the radio
plays.

CASSETTE DOOR
Set the cassette with the exposed portion of the tape on the right
side and insert it through the cassette door (8).

FAST FORWARD, REWIND BUTTONS


These buttons (9) are used to fast-forward or rewind the tape.
Fast-forward/rewind
If you press the button pointing in the same direction as the
lighted arrow indicating the direction of play, the tape will be
fast-forwarded; if you press the button pointing in the opposite
direction, the tape will rewind.
To stop the tape, lightly press the button that is not locked. The
fast-forward or rewind operation will be canceled.
If the fast forward and rewind buttons are pressed at the same
time, the tape will change sides.

PRESET BUTTONS
These buttons (10) are used to call up the broadcast station
frequencies preset in memory for each of buttons No. 1 to No. 6.
It is possible to preset 18 stations (FM: 12; AM: 6) with these
buttons.

3 - 41
.

EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS OPERATION

METAL TAPE BUTTON


(used also for preset button No. 5)
This button (11) is used when playing a metal or chrome tape. This
button is also used for preset button No. 5. When it is pressed,
"MTL" appears on the display.

MANUAL TUNING BUTTONS


These buttons (12) are used for manual tuning.
When "TUN ∧" button is pressed, the frequency goes up 9 kHz for
AM or 0.1 MHz for FM; when "TUN ∨" button is pressed, the
frequency goes down 9 kHz for AM or 0.1 MHz for FM.
If the button is pressed down and held, the frequency will change
continuously.

SEEK TUNING BUTTONS


These buttons (13) are used to seek tuning.
When the "SEEK UP" button is pressed, the search automatically
goes up; when the "SEEK DOWN" button is pressed, the search
automatically goes down.
When the next station that can be received is found, it
automatically stops.

BAND SELECTOR BUTTON


When this button (14) is pressed, the band is switched between
FM1, FM2, and MW (AM). The band is shown on the display.

3 - 42
.

OPERATION EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS

METHOD OF OPERATION

METHOD OF SETTING PRESET BUTTONS


To listen to a preset station, use band selector button (1) to select
AM, FM1, or FM2, then press the preset switch number to listen to
the desired station.
It is possible to preset six AM stations and 12 FM stations (FM1: 6,
FM2: 6).

1. If you are playing a cassette, press the tape eject button to stop
the tape.
2. Select the station to be preset.
Use band selector button (1) to select MW (AM), FM1, or FM2,
then use the manual tuning button to select the frequency of
the broadcasting station.
3. Press manual memory button (2) or seek tuning button (3).
4. Press preset button (4) of the number to be preset for 2
seconds while the frequency display is being shown on the
display. (The preset channel and frequency are displayed and
the presetting is completed).
5. Repeat Steps 2 to 4 to preset other stations.

REMARK
Use Steps 2 to 4 also when changing the setting of a preset
switch to another station.
When the power is disconnected, such as when the battery is
replaced, all the settings are deleted, so preset the stations
again.

3 - 43
.

EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS OPERATION

MANUAL MEMORY BUTTON


Select the station to be preset with manual tuning button (1) or
seek tuning button (2), then keep button No.1 to button No.6 of
button (3) pressed for 2 seconds while the frequency is being
displayed to preset the station.

LISTENING TO RADIO
1. Turn the starting switch ON, then turn power switch (1) ON.
2. Set band selector button (2) to AM or FM.
3. Select the station with the preset buttons or manual tuning
button (3).
4. Adjust the volume, balance, and tone as desired.
5. When turning the radio OFF, turn power switch (1) to the left
until it clicks.

REMARK
To switch to the radio when listening to a cassette, press the cassette eject button to stop the tape.
If you insert a cassette when listening to the radio, the tape will start to play.

3 - 44
.

OPERATION EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS

LISTENING TO CASSETTE TAPE


1. Turn the starting switch ON, then turn power switch (1) ON.
2. Set the cassette with the exposed portion of the tape on the
right side and push it past the cassette door. The tape will
automatically start playing.
If the arrow indicating the direction of play is pointing to the
right, the top side is being played; if the arrow is pointing to the
left, the bottom side is being played.
When the tape reaches the end, it is automatically reversed
and the other side starts to play.
3. When finished with the tape, press the cassette eject button to
eject the tape and automatically switch to the radio.

REVERSING TAPE
When listening to the tape, press both FAST FORWARD,
REWIND buttons (A) and (B) at the same time lightly.
When this is done, the tape direction display will be reversed.

3 - 45
.

EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS OPERATION

PRECAUTIONS FOR USE


Stow the antenna when traveling in places with low overhead clearance.
To ensure safety during operations, keep the volume at a level where it is possible to hear other machines.
If water gets inside the speaker case or radio (auto tuning), it may cause a serious problem, take care not to let
water get in these items.
Do not wipe the scales or buttons with benzene, thinner, or any other solvent. Wipe with a soft dry cloth. Use a
cloth soaked in alcohol if the equipment is extremely dirty.

NOTICE
Handling cassette tape
Clean the tape head approx. once a month with a commercially available head cleaning tape.
Do not leave the tape any place where it is exposed to direct sunlight, any place that is excessively dusty, or any place where
there is a magnetic field.
Do not use 120-minute tapes. The tape is thin and it easily gets caught up inside the machine.
If the tape is slack, it easily gets caught up inside the machine. Use a pencil to wind in the tape to remove any slack.
Do not use any cassette tape if the label has started to come off. It may cause defective rotation, or it may be impossible to get
the tape out of the machine.

3 - 46
.

OPERATION EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS

AIR CONDITIONER
By taking fresh air into the cab through a filter, it is possible to raise the pressure inside the cab. This makes it
possible to provide a pleasant working environment even on dusty jobsites.

GENERAL LOCATIONS ON CONTROL PANEL

(1) Fan switch (4) RECIRC/FRESH selector switch


(2) Air conditioner switch (5) Temperature control switch
(3) Mode selector switch

FAN SWITCH
This switch (1) can be used to adjust the air flow to 4 stages.
This switch also acts as the main switch for the air conditioner.
When the switch is pressed, the indicator lamp above the switch
lights up to indicate the air flow.

3 - 47
.

EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS OPERATION

AIR CONDITIONER SWITCH


This switch (2) is used to start or stop the cooling or dehumidifying
function.
When the fan switch is turned ON and the air conditioner switch is
pressed, the indicator lamp above the switch lights up.
When the switch is pressed again, the switch is turned OFF and
the indicator lamp goes out.

MODE SELECTOR SWITCH


This switch (3) is used to select the vents.
The following five vent modes are available: FACE, FACE/FOOT,
FOOT, FOOT/DEF, DEF.
When the switch is pressed, the indicator lamp above the switch
lights up to display the vent mode.

RECIRC/FRESH SELECTOR SWITCH


This switch (4) changes between recirculation of the internal air (RECIRC) or intake of external air (FRESH).
When pressing the switch, the indicator lamp on the top of switch lights up.

RECIRC
This switch (4) is used when wishing to quickly cool or warm the
cab or when the air inside the cab is stale.

FRESH
This switch (4) is used to cool or warm the cab with the fresh. Also,
it is used for fresh air intake or to remove condensation on
windows.

3 - 48
.

OPERATION EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS

TEMPERATURE CONTROL SWITCH


The temperature can be adjusted with this switch (5) steplessly
from low temperature to high temperature.

The temperature level indicator lamps light up to display the


temperature of the air coming from the vents.
The more the green lamps light up, the lower the temperature is.

The color of the indicator lamp changes while the switch is being
pressed.
When the temperature reaches the desired level, release the
switch to set the temperature.

The settings for each mode are retained in memory even when the
starting switch is turned OFF.
However, in the following cases, the settings must be made again.
When the machine has been out of use for more than 7 days
When the battery voltage is extremely low
When there has been abnormal interference from outside
When the fan switch is turned OFF (the setting is not kept in
memory with only the air conditioner switch)

If the air conditioner is used at the FRESH position, the inside of


the cab will be pressurized and this will prevent the entry of dust.
The higher the position of the fan switch, the more effective the
pressurizing becomes.

3 - 49
.

EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS OPERATION

METHOD OF OPERATION

Switch
Air conditioner Temperature RECIRC/FRESH Mode selector
Fan switch
switch control switch selector switch switch
Condition of use
Rapid HI ON All green RECIRC FACE
Cooling More than half
Normal HI - LO ON FRESH FACE
are green
Dehumidifying, More than half
HI - LO ON FRESH FOOT
heating are red
Rapid HI OFF All red RECIRC FOOT
Heating More than half
Normal HI - LO OFF FRESH FOOT
are red
More than half
Defroster HI ON FRESH DEF
are red
Vetilation or
HI - LO OFF All green FRESH FACE
pressurizing
When carrying out the defrosting, if the temperature control switch is set so that all lamps are red, this will improve
the performance for defrosting and demisting.
With the FACE vents, it is possible to adjust the direction of the air flow and to turn it on or off.
However, do not set to the FACE mode with the vents closed.

WHEN NOT USING THE AIR CONDITIONER REGURARLY


To lubricate each part of the compressor, operate cooling, dehumidifying and heating for 3 to 5 minutes once a
month at low idle. Also, check the amount of cooling gas twice a year.

REMARK
If the temperature inside the cab is low, the air conditioner may not work. In such cases, use the recirculated air to
warm up the inside of the cab, then turn the air conditioner switch on. The air conditioner will be run.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING AIR CONDITIONER

Carry out ventilation from time to time when using the cooling.
If you smoke when using the cooling, your eyes may start to sting, so in such a case, carry out ventilation and
cooling for a short time to remove the smoke.
When using the air conditioner for a long period of time, carry out ventilation process at least once every hour.

Be careful not to cool the cab too much.


When using the air conditioner, it is recommended for health reasons, that it should only feel slightly cooler (5 or 6
°C (9 or 10.8°F) lower than the outside temperature) when you enter the cab.
Therefore, adjust the temperature to a suitable level.

3 - 50
.

OPERATION EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE


Even when not using the air conditioner, run the compressor at low speed for several minutes once a week to
prevent the loss of the oil film at various parts of the compressor. (Run the engine at low speed and set the
temperature control lever to the central position.)

Clean the air filter and check the refrigerant. For details, see "CLEAN AIR CONDITIONER AIR FILTER (PAGE
4-24)" and "CHECK REFRIGERANT (GAS) LEVEL (PAGE 4-25)".

To enable the air conditioner to perform to the full and to maintain a pleasant working environment, always contact
your Komatsu distributor to have the air conditioner refilled with refrigerant and to carry out other checks.

3 - 51
.

EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS OPERATION

CAR HEATER

GENERAL LOCATIONS ON CONTROL PANEL

(1) Heater switch (2) Vent selector knob

HEATER SWITCH
This switch is used for turning the heater ON/OFF and for adjusting
the air flow.
Stopped:OFF
(1) Low
(2) High

VENT SELECTOR KNOB


This is used to select the vent.
(1) Foot
(2) Defroster

3 - 52
.

OPERATION EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS

PRECAUTIONS WHEN HANDLING


1. When using the car heater, open valve (1) installed to the
engine thermostat housing.
2. When the season for using the car heater ends, close valve (1).

PRECAUTIONS ON USING HEATER


In winter season always use antifreeze fluid with the density suitable to outside air temperature. Do not use
antifreeze fluid stored over a period longer than its recommended serviceable life.
If you don't use antifreeze fluid in winter season for your car, drain the coolant from the radiator after at the end
of each day.
Be sure to change the water hose every two years.
DAILY INSPECTION
If malfunctions are found as follows, go to the car dealer for repair.
Scratch cracks or swelling of hose.
Water leaks from the joint of water hose.
Removal of protection cover for the water hose.
Broken heater unit bracket or loosening of heater unit installation bolts.
Since this heater warms the cab by using hot water from the engine, it functions only while the engine coolant is hot.

LOCATION OF FIRE EXTINGUISHER


Fire extinguisher (1) is located on top of the air piping cover at the
right outside rear.

LOCATION OF FIRST AID KIT


First aid box (1) is located on top of the rear cover in the cab.

3 - 53
.

OPERATION OPERATION

OPERATION
CHECK BEFORE STARTING ENGINE

WALK-AROUND CHECK
Before starting the engine, look around the machine and under the machine to check for loose nuts or bolts, or
leakage of oil, fuel, or coolant, and check the condition of the hydraulic system.
Check also for loose wiring, play, and accumulation of dust in places that get very hot and are exposed to extremely
high temperatures.

WARNING
Be sure to attach the warning sign on the operaation lever of the machine.
Leakage of oil or fuel, or accumulation of flammable material around high temperature parts, such as the engine muffler or
turbocharger, may cause fire. Check carefully, and if any abnormality is found, repair it or contact your Komatsu distributor.

Always carry out the following items before starting the engine each day.

1. Check the dump body, frame, tires, cylinders, linkage, and hoses for cracks or excessive wear or play.
Check the dump body, frame, tires, cylinders, linkage, and hoses for cracks or excessive wear or play, and carry out
repairs if any problem is found.

2. Remove dirt from around engine, battery, radiator, and aftercooler.


Check that there is no dirt or dust accumulated around the engine, radiator or aftercooler. Check also that there is
no flammable material (dry leaves, twigs, etc.) accumulated around the battery, or engine, muffler, turbocharger, or
other high temperature parts of the engine. Remove any dirt or flammable materials that are found.

3. Check for leakage of water or oil around engine


Check that there is no oil leakage from the engine or coolant leakage from the cooling system. If any problem is
found, repair it.

4. Check for oil leakage from transmission case, differential case, final drive case, brake oil tank, hydraulic tank,
hose, joint
Check that there is no oil leakage. If any problem is found, repair the place where the oil is leaking.
Check for leakage of oil from the undercover. Check the ground for traces of oil leakage.

5. Check for loose air cleaner mounting bolts.


Check for the loose bolts. If loose, tighten them.

6. Check dump body mount rubber


Check for any cracks, embedded foreign objects, or loose bolts.

7. Check for damage to handrail, loose bolts


Repair any damage and tighten any loose bolts.

3 - 54
.

OPERATION OPERATION

8. Check for damage to gauges, lamps on the instrument panel and loose bolts.
Check for damage to the panel, gauges and lamps. If any problem is found, replace the parts. Clean off any dirt on
the surface. Tighten any loose bolts.

9. Check rear view mirror, under view mirror


Check for any damage to the mirrors, and if any damage is found, replace the mirror. Clean all dirt from the surface
of the mirror and adjust the angle so that the view to the rear and below the machine can be seen from the operator's
seat.

10. Check for damage to the seat belt and mounting clamps.
Check for damage to seat belt and mounting clamps. If damages are found, replace with the new one.
Check for any loose bolts of the clamps mounting the equipment to the machine. Tighten any loose bolts.
When the belt has been used for a long time, if any external damage or fraying of the belt can be seen, or if the
clamps are broken or deformed, replace the seat belt.

11. Check cracks and damage of ROPS (if equipped) and check for loose bolts
Check if any bolt is loose or damaged. If it is loos, tighten up (torque: 1720 ± 196 N·m 175 ± 20kgf·m, 1265.8
± 144.7 lbft). If it is loose replace it with Komatsu genuine bolt.

12. Inspect tires.

WARNING
If worn or damaged tires are used, they may burst and cause serious injury
or death.
To ensure safety, do not use the following tires.
Wear:
Tires with a tread grooves of less than 15% of that of a new tire
Tires with extreme uneven wear or with stepped-type wear
Damage:
Tires with damage that has reached the cords, or with cracks in the
rubber
Tires with cut or pulled cords
Tires with peeled (separated) surface
Tires with damaged bead
Leaking or improperly repaired tubeless tires
Deteriorated, deformed or abnormally damaged tires, which do not
seem usable

13. Inspect rims.

WARNING
Check the rims (wheels) and rings for deformation, corrosion and cracks.
In particular, check the side rings, lock rings and rim flanges thoroughly.

3 - 55
.

OPERATION OPERATION

CHECK BEFORE STARTING


Always perform the procedures in this section before starting the engine each day.

CHECK COOLANT LEVEL, ADD COOLANT

WARNING
Do not open the radiator cap unless necessary. Wait for the engine to cool down before checking the coolant in the sub-tank.
Immediately after the engine is stopped, the coolant is at a high temperature and the radiator is under high internal pressure.
If the cap is removed to check the coolant level in this condition, there is a hazard of burns. Wait for the temperature to go
down, then turn the cap slowly to release the pressure before removing it.

1. Check that the cooling water level is between the FULL and
LOW marks on radiator reserve tank gauge (G).
If the water level is low, add water through the water filler (1) of
the reserve tank to the FULL level.
2. Check that there is no oil in the coolant or any other
abnormality.
3. After adding coolant, tighten the cap securely.
4. If the volume of coolant added is more than usual, check for
possible water leakage.

CHECK OIL LEVEL IN FRONT BRAKE OIL TANK, ADD OIL

CAUTION
When adding oil to the brake oil tank, always use the recommended oil. For details, see "RECOMMENDED FUEL, COOLANT, AND
LUBRICANT (PAGE 4-9)".

1. Check that the oil is between the FULL and LOW marks on
sight gauge (G).
If the oil level is low, add oil through oil filler (F).

2. After adding the oil, then tighten the cap securely.


3. If the oil level goes down right after oil has been added, then
check for leakage in the oil lines.

3 - 56
.

OPERATION OPERATION

CHECK DUST INDICATOR


1. Check that the red piston has not appeared in the transparent
portion of dust indicator (1).
2. If the red piston has appeared, clean or replace the air cleaner
element immediately.
For details of the method of cleaning the element, see
"CHECK, CLEAN OR REPLACE AIR CLEANER (PAGE
4-19)".
3. After checking, cleaning, or replacing, press dust indicator (1)
to return the red piston to its original position.

DRAIN WATER FROM AIR TANK


1. After starting the engine, pull ring (1) of the tank drain valve to
drain the water from the tank.
2. Carry out the same operation after completing work.

NOTICE
In cold areas, there is danger of the water freezing, so drain the water from
the air tank after operations when it is still warm.

3 - 57
.

OPERATION OPERATION

CHECK OIL LEVEL IN ENGINE OIL PAN, ADD OIL

WARNING
Parts and oil are at high temperature immediately after the engine is stopped and may cause serious burns. Wait for the oil
temperature to go down before performing this operation.

1. Check the oil level with dipstick (G).


2. Take out the dipstick (G) and wipe off the oil with cloth.
3. Fully insert dipstick (G) into filler pipe (F), then remove it.
4. The oil level should be between the H and L marks on the
ENGINE STOPPED side of dipstick (G).
If the oil is below the L mark, add oil through oil filler (F).

5. If the oil is above the H mark, remove drain plug (1), and loosen
drain valve (2) to drain the excess engine oil, then check the
engine oil level again.

6. If the oil level is correct, tighten the handle of the oil filler cap
securely.

REMARK
When checking the oil level after the engine has been operated, wait for at least 15 minutes after stopping the
engine.
The dipstick has the oil level marked on both sides: ENGINE STOPPED for measuring when the engine is
stopped, and ENGINE IDLING for measuring when the engine is idling.
When checking the oil level, stop the engine and check with the ENGINE STOPPED side of the dipstick.
It is also possible to check when the engine is idling, but the following procedure must be used.
• Check that the engine water temperature is in the green range.
• Use the ENGINE IDLING side of the dipstick.
• Remove the oil filler cap.

3 - 58
.

OPERATION OPERATION

CHECK OIL LEVEL IN TRANSMISSION CASE, ADD OIL


1. After starting the engine, run the engine at low idle and check
the oil level with sight gauge (G2).
2. If the oil level is low, add oil through oil filler (F).

NOTICE
The oil level changes according to the oil temperature, so carry out the
check after completing the warming-up operation.
Check that the torque converter oil temperature gauge is in green range
(A) on the monitor panel.
During operations, or when the engine is running at idling after
operations, the oil level be above (G2).
When checking the oil level with the engine stopped, check with sight
gauge (G1) as a guide line, and make the final check with (G2).

3 - 59
.

OPERATION OPERATION

CHECK OIL LEVEL IN STEERING AND HOIST OIL TANK, ADD OIL

WARNING
If the oil filler cap is removed without releasing the internal pressure, oil will
spurt out, so turn the oil filler cap slowly to release the internal pressure,
then remove it carefully.

1. Check with sight gauge (G).


2. If the oil level is not up to the window of sight gauge (G), add
oil through oil filler (F).

CHECK OIL LEVEL IN REAR BRAKE COOLING OIL TANK, ADD OIL

WARNING
When removing the oil filler cap, oil may spurt out, so turn the cap slowly
to release the internal pressure before removing the cap.

1. Check with sight gauge (G).


2. If the oil level is not up to the window of sight gauge (G), add
oil through oil filler (F).

DRAIN WATER, SEDIMENT FROM FUEL TANK


Loosen valve (1) at the bottom of the fuel tank, and drain the water
and sediment collected at the bottom of the tank together with the
fuel.

3 - 60
.

OPERATION OPERATION

CHECK FUEL LEVEL, ADD FUEL

WARNING
When adding fuel, never let the fuel overflow. This may cause a fire. If any
fuel is spilled, wipe it up completely. Never bring flames near fuel because
it is highly flammable and dangerous.

1. Check the fuel level with fuel gauge (G), which is installed in the
side of the fuel tank.
2. After completing operations, add fuel through fuel filler (F) to fill
the tank.
Fuel tank capacity: 1250 liters (330 US gal)

3. After adding fuel, tighten the cap securely.

REMARK
If the breather hole in the cap becomes clogged, the pressure
inside the tank will go down and the fuel may not flow, so clean the
breather hole from time to time.

CHECK WHEEL HUB NUTS, TIGHTEN


Check for loose hub nuts, and if any are loose, tighten 3 or 4 times
to the specified torque in the order given in the diagram.
Tightening torque
2210 ± 245 N·m (225 ± 25 kgf·m, 1627.4 ± 180.8 lbft)
(When thread are not coated with grease)
1720 ± 196 N·m (175 ± 20 kgf·m, 1265.8 ± 144.7 lbft)
(When thread are coated with molybdenum disulphide grease)
Insert a socket wrench in a pipe, and apply a force of 2210 N (225
kgf) at a point 1 m from the fulcrum to give a tightening torque of
2210 N·m (225 kgf·m).

If any stud bolt used to install the rim is broken, replace all the stud
bolts for that wheel.

3 - 61
.

OPERATION OPERATION

CHECK CENTRAL WARNING LAMP


Carry out the following checks to prevent failure by the warning
system due to defective operation of the buzzer or blown lamp bulb
in central warning lamp (1). If any abnormality is found, ask
Komatsu distributor for inspection.
Stop the engine, turn the starting switch to the ON position, set
the parking brake valve lever to the PARKING position, move
the shift lever to any position other than N, and check. If the lamp
flashes and buzzer sounds, it is normal.
If the air pressure is below the specified pressure, the lamp
should flash and the buzzer should sound when the starting
switch is turned ON.

CHECK BRAKING EFFECT


Check if the braking capacity of the parking brake, foot brake, and retarder brake.
If any abnormality is found, ask Komatsu distributor to repair.

CHECK MACHINE MONITOR SYSTEM


1. Before starting the engine, turn the starting switch to the ON position.
2. Check that all monitor lamps, gauges, and the central warning lamp light up for approx. 3 seconds and that the
alarm buzzer sounds for approx. 1 second.

REMARK
When this is done, the speedometer should display 88.
When the starting switch is turned to the ON position, the pilot lamp at the transmission shift lever position will
flash if the shift lever is not at the N position. When the shift lever is moved to the N position, N is displayed.
After the engine is stopped, the monitor cannot be checked until at least 30 seconds have passed.

3. When checking the monitor, check for blown bulbs in the the
caution lamps and pilot lamps at the same time. Before starting
the engine, turn the starting switch to the ON position, press
bulb check switch (1), and check that no caution lamp or pilot
lamp bulb is blown.
If the monitor lamp, caution lamp, or pilot lamp do not light up,
there is probably a failure or disconnection, therefore contact
your Komatsu distributor for inspection.

3 - 62
.

OPERATION OPERATION

CHECK BRAKING CAPACITY OF EMERGENCY BRAKE

WARNING
If the machine moves, it will lead to the serious human injury. If the machine starts to move while checking the braking capacity,
lower the engine speed and set the shift lever to N position. Then set the parking brake lever to PARKING position.

Check the braking capacity of the emergency brake as follows.


1. Set the air pressure to the maximum with the machine on flat
ground, set the parking brake valve lever to TRAVEL position
and move emergency brake lever (1) to the ON (applied)
position.
2. Set gear shift lever (2) to the D position, gradually raise the
engine speed, and check that the machine does not move
even when the engine reaches full speed. If the machine does
not move, it is normal.
3. Lower the engine speed and set the shift lever to N position.
Set parking brake valve lever to PARKING position.

CHECK EMERGENCY STEERING

Check manual emergency steering


1. Turn the starting switch key to the ON position.
2. Turn emergency steering switch (1) ON, and check that the
steering wheel can be operated.
If the steering wheel cannot be operated, please contact your
Komatsu distributor.

Check auto-emergency steering


1. Turn the starting switch key to the START position and start the
engine.
2. Check that the air pressure gauge is in the green range, then
pull retarder lever (2) fully and stop the engine.
3. Turn the starting switch key to the ON position.
4. Check that the emergency steering is actuated and the
steering can be operated 1.5 seconds after parking brake
valve lever (3) is set to the TRAVEL position.

CHECK BACKUP ALARM


1. Turn the engine starting switch to the ON position.
2. Place the gear shift lever in the R position and check that the backup alarm is working.

3 - 63
.

OPERATION OPERATION

CHECK ELECTRIC WIRING

WARNING
If the fuses frequently blow or if there are traces of short circuits in the electrical wiring, locate the cause and immediately
perform repairs, or contact your Komatsu distributor for repairs.
Keep the top surface of the battery clean and check the breather hole in the battery cap. If it is clogged with dirt or dust, wash
the battery cap to clean the breather hole.

Check for damage and wrong capacity of the fuse and any sign of disconnection or short circuit in the electrical
wiring. Check also for loose terminals and tighten any loose parts.
Check the wiring of the "battery", "starting motor"and "alternator"carefully, in particular.
Always check if there is any accumulation of flammable material around the battery, and remove such flammable
material.
Please contact your Komatsu distributor for investigation and correction of any problems found.

CHECK INFLATION PRESSURE OF TIRES


Measure the inflation pressure with a tire pressure gauge, while the tires are cool, before starting work.
Check for damage or wear to the tires and the rims.
Check for loose wheel hub nuts (bolts).
The proper inflation pressure is shown below.

Standard inflation pressure (front wheel and rear wheel)

Tire size Inflation pressure


27.00R49!! (standard) 0.69 MPa (7.00 kgf/cm2, 99.4 PSI)
27.00-49-48PR (if equipped) 0.55 MPa (5.60 kgf/cm2, 79.52 PSI)

NOTICE
If the tires are used when the inflation pressure is less than the value given in the table above, the rim may be damaged.
Always keep the tire inflation pressure within +0 to +0.03 MPa (0.3 kgf/cm2, 4.3 PSI) of the value in the table above.

3 - 64
.

OPERATION OPERATION

ADJUSTMENT BEFORE OPERATION

ADJUSTING OPERATOR'S SEAT

WARNING
Adjust the seat position at the beginning of each shift or when operators change.
Adjust the seat so that the brake pedal can be depressed all the way with the operators back against the backrest.

(A) Fore-and-aft adjustment


Move lever (1) to the right, set the seat to the desired position, then
release the lever.
Adjustment range: 140 mm (5.5 in) (7 stages)

(B) Adjusting seat angle


Pull lever (2) up, set the seat angle to the desired position, then
release the lever.
Adjustment range: Seat surface approx. 2.7° up and down

(C) Setting seat for operator's weight


Turn grip (3) under the seat to adjust weight adjustment scale (4)
to your own weight.
Adjustment range: 50 to 120kg (110 to 265 lb)

REMARK
To make the seat softer, adjust the weight to make it lighter; to
make the seat harder, adjust the weight to make it heavier.
When traveling on rough road surfaces, make the seat harder
before starting operations.

(D) Adjusting backrest angle


Pull lever (5), set the backrest to the desired position, then release the lever.
Adjustment range: 28 stages (56°)

(E) Seat height adjustment


Move lever (6), set the seat to the desired position, then release the lever.
Adjustment range: 50 mm (2.0 in)

3 - 65
.

OPERATION OPERATION

ADJUST SEAT BELT

WARNING
Before fastening the seat belt, check that there is no problem in the securing brackets or belt. If there is any wear or damage,
replace.
Even if there appears to be no problem in the seat belt, replace the seat belt once every 3 years. The date of manufacture is
woven on the reverse side of the belt.
Adjust and fasten the seat belt before operating the machine.
Always use the seat belt when operating the machine.
Do not use the seat belt with either half of the belt twisted.

Fastening and removing belt


1. Sit on the seat, depress the brake pedal fully, and adjust the
seat so that your back is pressed against the backrest.
2. Sit on the seat, take buckle (1) and tongue (3) in your left and
right hands, insert tongue (3) into buckle (1), and pull the belt
to check that it is securely locked.
3. When removing the belt, press button (2) of buckle (1) to
release the belt.

Fasten the belt along your body without kinking it. Adjust the
lengths of the belt on both the buckle and the tongue sides so
that the buckle is located at the front, mid-point of your body.

Adjust belt length


To make belt shorter:
Pull the free end of the belt at the buckle end or tongue end.

3 - 66
.

OPERATION OPERATION

To make belt longer:


Set the belt holding the buckle or tongue end at right angles to the
buckle or tongue, and pull.

ADJUST STEERING WHEEL TILT

WARNING
Always stop the machine before adjusting the tilt of the steering wheel.

The tilt of the steering wheel can be adjusted to the front and rear,
and up and down. Pull lever up and set the steering wheel to the
desired position, then push lever down to lock the steering wheel
securely in position.
Adjustment range: Front-rear: 5 degrees
Up: 30 mm (1.2 in)
Down: 20 mm (0.8 in)

3 - 67
.

OPERATION OPERATION

OPERATIONS, CHECKS BEFORE STARTING


WARNING
At the time of starting the engine, check that the shift lever is set at N
(neutral) position and that the parking brake valve lever is at PARKING
position.
Before standing up from the operator's seat, place the gear shift lever at
neutral, and set the parking brake valve lever to the PARKING position.

1. Check that parking brake valve lever (1) is at the PARKING


position.

2. Check that gear shift lever (2) is at the N position.

REMARK
If the gear shift lever is not at the N (neutral) position, the engine will
not start. If the starting switch is turned to the ON position when the
gear shift lever is not at N (neutral), the transmission shift lever
position pilot lamp and the central warning lamp will flash and the
alarm buzzer will sound.

3. Check that dump lever (3) is at the FLOAT position.

4. Check that retarder control lever (4) is at the RELEASED


position.

3 - 68
.

OPERATION OPERATION

5. Check that there is no abnormality on the machine monitor or


maintenance monitor when the key in starting switch (5) is
turned to the ON position.

3 - 69
.

OPERATION OPERATION

STARTING ENGINE

NORMAL STARTING
WARNING
Sit down in the operator's seat before starting the engine.
Do not attempt to start the engine by short-circuiting the engine starting
circuit. Such an act may cause serious bodily injury or fire.
Check that there are no persons or obstacles in the surrounding area,
then sound the horn and start the engine.
Exhaust gas is toxic. When starting the engine in confined spaces, be
particularly careful to ensure good ventilation.

NOTICE
Do not keep the starting motor rotating continuously for more than 20 seconds.
If the engine will not start, wait for at least 2 minutes before trying to start the engine again.

1. Turn the key of starting switch (1) to the START position to start
the engine.

2. When the engine starts, release the key in starting switch (1).
The key will return automatically to the ON position.

3 - 70
.

OPERATION OPERATION

STARTING IN COLD WEATHER


WARNING
Start the engine only after sitting down in the operator's seat.
Do not attempt to start the engine by short-circuiting the engine starting
circuit. Such an act may cause a serious bodily injury or fire.
Check that there are no persons or obstacles in the surrounding area,
then sound the horn and start the engine.
Never use starting aid fluids as they may cause explosions.
Exhaust gas is toxic. When starting the engine in confined spaces, be
particularly careful to ensure good ventilation.

NOTICE
Do not keep the starting motor rotating continuously for more than 20 seconds.
If the engine will not start, wait for at least 2 minutes before trying to start the engine again.

1. Turn the key of starting switch (1) to the ON position.


2. The preheating will start automatically and the preheating pilot
lamp will light up.

The pre-heating times are as shown below.

Ambient temperature Preheating time


0°C to -5°C –
-5°C to -10°C 30 to 40 seconds
-10°C to -20°C 60 seconds
-20°C to -30°C 90 seconds

3. When the preheating is completed, the preheating pilot lamp


will go out. Turn the key in starting switch (1) to the START
position to start the engine.

REMARK
When starting the engine, the monitor may flash while the starting
motor is turning, but if the monitor lamp goes out after the engine
is started, there is no problem.

3 - 71
.

OPERATION OPERATION

4. When the engine starts, release the key in starting switch (1).
The key will return automatically to the ON position.

3 - 72
.

OPERATION OPERATION

OPERATIONS, CHECKS AFTER STARTING ENGINE

BREAKING-IN THE MACHINE


CAUTION
Your Komatsu machine has been thoroughly adjusted and tested before shipment. However, operating the machine under severe
conditions at the beginning can adversely affect the performance and shorten the machine life.
Be sure to break-in the machine for the initial 100 hours (as indicated by the service meter).
During break-in operations, follow the precautions described in this manual.

Idle the engine for 5 minutes after starting it up.


Avoid operation with heavy loads or at high speeds.
Immediately after starting the engine, avoid sudden starts, sudden acceleration, unnecessary sudden stops, and
sudden changes in direction.

WARMING-UP OPERATION
NOTICE
Do not accelerate the engine suddenly until the warming-up operation has been completed.
Do not run the engine at low idle or high idle continuously for more than 20 minutes.
If it is necessary to continue to run the engine at idle, apply a load from time to time or run the engine at a mid-range speed.

After starting the engine, do not immediately start operations. First, perform the following operations and checks.

1. After starting the engine, run the engine at idle for 5 minutes for warming up operation.
2. After the warming-up operation, check that the machine monitor is normal.
If there is any problem, carry out maintenance or repair.
Run the engine under a light load until the engine water temperature gauge and air pressure gauge enter the
green range.
When the AISS switch is at the AUTO position and the engine water temperature is still low, high idling revolution
is automatically maintained (for optional electronic governor specification).
3. Check if there is no abnormality in the steering operation, flashing of lights, sound of horn, exhaust gas color,
noise, or vibration. If any abnormality is found, repair it.

3 - 73
.

OPERATION OPERATION

STOPPING ENGINE
NOTICE
If the engine is suddenly stopped without allowing it to cool down, there is
danger that the life of the engine parts will be shortened, so never stop the
engine suddenly except in emergency.
Allow the engine to cool down gradually before stopping it.

1. Run the engine at low idle for about 5 minutes to cool down
gradually.
2. Turn the key of starting switch (1) to the OFF position to stop
the engine.
3. Remove the key from starting switch (1).

CHECKS AFTER STOPPING ENGINE


1. Walk around the machine and check the body work, and undercarriage, and check also for leakage of oil and
water.
2. Fill the fuel tank.
3. Check the engine compartment for paper and debris. Clean out any paper and debris to avoid a fire hazard.
4. Remove any mud affixed to the undercarriage.

3 - 74
.

OPERATION OPERATION

MOVING MACHINE OFF (FORWARD, REVERSE), STOPPING

MOVING MACHINE FORWARD


WARNING
When moving the machine off, check that the area around the machine
is safe, then sound the horn before starting.
Do not allow people to get near the machine.
Clear the machine's travel path of any obstacle.
Pay a particular attention to the blind spot at the rear of the machine,
when traveling the machine in reverse.

1. Check that there is no warning display on the machine monitor.

2. Check that your seat belt is fastened and that dump lever (1) is
at the FLOAT position.

3. Depress the brake pedal fully. Check that air pressure gauge
(2) is in the green range, then set parking brake valve lever (3)
to the TRAVEL position to release the parking brake.

3 - 75
.

OPERATION OPERATION

4. Check that retarder pilot lamp (4) has gone out, then set shift
lever (5) to the desired position.

NOTICE
When operating the shift lever, be sure to set it in position securely.
If the lever is not placed in position properly, the shift position display
on the panel may go out and the transmission warning monitor lamp
may light up.
Always release the accelerator pedal before shifting from N to R or F.

5. Depress accelerator pedal (6) to move the machine off.

NOTICE
If the parking brake is not released, and the shift lever is shifted to a
position other than N, the central warning lamp will flash and the alarm
buzzer will sound.
If the dump lever is not at the FLOAT position, and the shift lever is
shifted to a position other than N, the central warning lamp will flush and
the alarm buzzer will sound.
Do not operate the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. This
will cause a big shock, and will also reduce the life of the machine.

3 - 76
.

OPERATION OPERATION

MOVING MACHINE IN REVERSE


WARNING
When switching between FORWARD and REVERSE, check that the new
direction of travel is safe.
There is a blind spot behind the machine, so use extreme caution when
reversing the machine.
Always stop the machine completely before shifting between
FORWARD and REVERSE.

Place gear shift lever (1) in the R position, then gradually depress
accelerator pedal (2) to move the machine off.

NOTICE
The machine cannot travel in reverse if the dump lever is not at the
FLOAT position. Place the dump lever at the FLOAT position before
operating to the R position.
When shifting between FORWARD and REVERSE, stop the machine
completely, and run the engine at low idle when shifting the lever.
After moving the gear shift lever, do not depress the accelerator until
you detect that the transmission clutch has engaged.
Do not operate the gear shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This will cause a big shock, and will also reduce the life of the machine.

3 - 77
.

OPERATION OPERATION

STOPPING MACHINE
WARNING
Avoid stopping suddenly. Give yourself ample room when stopping.
If the foot brake is used repeatedly or is kept depressed for a long time,
the brake may overheat and its life will be shortened.
If the parking brake is used to stop the machine, the brake will be
damaged. Do not use the parking brake except when stopping in
emergencies or when parking the machine after stopping it.

NORMAL STOPPING
Release accelerator pedal (1), and depress brake pedal (2) to stop
the machine.

STOPPING IN EMERGENCY
If there should be a failure in the foot brake, stop the machine as
follows.

WARNING
When the machine stops, put blocks under the tires immediately.
Immediately after making an emergency stop, the parking brake disc
will be at high temperature, so wait for it to cool before carrying out
repair or adjustment. Ask Komatsu distributor for repair and
adjustment.

1. Pull retarder control lever (1) fully to apply the retarder.

3 - 78
.

OPERATION OPERATION

2. If operating the retarder control lever dose not give enough


braking force, set emergency brake lever (2) to the actuation
position to apply the emergency brake.
When emergency brake lever (2) is placed at the actuation
position, the parking brake is also automatically applied.

3. Set parking brake valve lever (3) to the right (to the PARKING)
position.
4. If an emergency stop has been made, put blocks under the
tires immediately, then try to find the cause, and repair it on
site.
5. After the emergency operation of parking brake and
emergency brake, see "RELEASE METHOD WHEN
PARKING BRAKE AND EMERGENCY BRAKE HAVE BEEN
ACTUATED IN EMERGENCY (PAGE 3-107)" in case that it is
necessary to release the brake.
6. If emergency stop has been made, it is necessary to re-adjust
the parking brake. Ask Komatsu distributor for adjustment.

3 - 79
.

OPERATION OPERATION

SHIFTING GEAR
When shifting gear, do as follows.
This machine has an automatic transmission, so set gear shift
lever (1) to the desired position, and the transmission will
automatically shift to a position to match the travel speed.
When the dump body has risen, the speed range is locked to 2nd
speed at the D position and 1st speed at the 5 - L position. While
traveling, lower the dump body.

NOTICE
When shifting between FORWARD and REVERSE, stop the machine
completely, and run the engine at low idle when shifting the lever. After
moving the gear shift lever, do not depress the accelerator until you
detect that the transmission clutch has engaged.
Do not operate the gear shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This will cause a big shock, and will also reduce the service life of the
machine.

SHIFTING UP
1. When accelerator pedal (2) is depressed to accelerate the
machine, the lockup clutch is engaged to shift the transmission
to direct drive.
2. If the machine is accelerated further, the transmission will
automatically shift up.

SHIFTING DOWN
If accelerator pedal (2) is released, the machine speed will be
reduced, and the transmission will automatically shift down.

OVERRUN PREVENTION DEVICE


If the travel speed goes above the maximum speed for the speed range while machine is traveling downhill, the
overrun prevention device is actuated to act the retarder and to reduce the travel speed.

3 - 80
.

OPERATION OPERATION

TRAVELING DOWNHILL
When traveling downhill, travel at a safe speed which matches the width of the road, the condition of the road
surface, and other conditions of the jobsite.

WARNING
If the machine is stopped, put blocks under the wheel immediately.
For the maximum permissible speed when traveling downhill using the retarder, see the brake performance graph for the
downhill distance and grade. Traveling continuously downhill at a speed greater than the maximum permitted speed on the
brake performance graph is dangerous as the retarder brake may be damaged.
If the retarder oil temperature monitor on the machine monitor flashes when using the retarder, shift down to travel downhill.
(When this happens, the central warning lamp flashes and the alarm buzzer sounds.)
If the monitor lamp does not go out even when the transmission is shifted down, stop the machine immediately, set the shift
lever to the N position, run the engine at the 2000 rpm, and wait for the monitor to go out.
If the retarder loses its effect when it is used for traveling downhill, do as follows.
1. Release the retarder brake completely, then operate the retarder lever again.
2. If the retarder still has no effect even when the retarder lever is operated again, return the retarder lever completely to the
released position, then depress the brake pedal to stop the machine, and contact your Komatsu distributor for repairs.
Operate the retarder slowly. If the brakes are applied suddenly, there is danger that the machine will skid.

NOTICE
If the retarder lever is operated when traveling downhill, the transmission can be shifted down sooner than with normal
deceleration. It is also possible to travel without shifting up.
When traveling downhill, do not use the foot brake except in an emergency. Using the foot brake will cause overheating of the
front brake and reduce the life.
Do not accelerate or shift up when using the retarder. The engine speed will rise and this may cause the alarm buzzer to sound
and the central warning lamp to flash.

1. Before starting to travel downhill, release accelerator pedal (1)


and operate retarder control lever (2) to slow the machine
down.

3 - 81
.

OPERATION OPERATION

2. Move the gear shift lever to a position (5, 4, 3, L) that matches


the maximum permissible speed for the retarder brake
performance.

3. When traveling downhill, operate retarder lever (2), run the


engine at a speed of at least 1,800 rpm, and travel so that the
retarder brake oil temperature gauge is in the green range.

For machines equipped with an exhaust brake, using the exhaust brake can provide more secure braking force for
increased safety, and will also improve the durability of the brake.
For details of handling the exhaust brake, see "EXHAUST BRAKE SWITCH (PAGE 3-24)".

3 - 82
.

OPERATION OPERATION

BRAKE PERFORMANCE CURVE


Method of using graph
Example: Downhill distance: 1500 m (4921 ft)
Travel resistance: - 11%
Grade resistance: - 13% [rolling resistance: 2%]
Load: 91 tons

Obtain the maximum permissible speed and the transmission speed range from the graph when traveling downhill
under the above conditions.

1. Use the brake performance graph for the downhill distance of 1,500 m (4,921 ft).
2. Starting from point (A) which corresponds to the overall weight of the machine, draw a perpendicular line down.
3. Take the point where it crosses the line for travel resistance -11% as (B) and draw a horizontal line.
4. Take the point where it crosses the performance curve as (C), and draw a perpendicular line down. Take the
point where this line crosses the travel speed scale as (D).
5. The following information can be obtained from this procedure.
Without exhaust brake
From point D: Maximum permissible speed =27 km/h (16.8 MPH)
From point C: Speed range = F4
With exhaust brake (if equipped)
From point F: Maximum permissible speed =36 km/h (22.4 MPH)
From point E: Speed range = F5

This maximum permissible speed is one guideline determined from the retarder brake performance, so on an actual
jobsite, determine a safe downhill travel speed (below the maximum permissible speed) to match the conditions of
the jobsite so that the retarder brake oil temperature gauge is always in the green range.

3 - 83
.

OPERATION OPERATION

Brake performance
[Downhill distance: 450 m (1476 ft)] (Tire size: 27.00R49!!)

Brake performance
[Downhill distance: 600m (1968ft)] (Tire size: 27.00R49!!)

3 - 84
.

OPERATION OPERATION

Brake performance
[Downhill distace: 900m (2952ft)] (Tire size: 27.00R49!!)

Brake performance
[Downhill distace: 1500m (4921ft)] (Tire size: 27.00R49!!)

3 - 85
.

OPERATION OPERATION

Brake performance
[Downhill distace: Continuous] (Tire size: 27.00R49!!)

3 - 86
.

OPERATION OPERATION

STEERING THE MACHINE


WARNING
If the machine is turned at high speed or on a steep slope, there is danger that it will turn over, so do not operate the steering in
such conditions.

CAUTION
Do not continue to apply force to the steering wheel when it has been turned fully to the left or right. This will make the oil
temperature in the circuit rise and will cause overheating.

To turn the machine when traveling, turn steering wheel (1) in the
direction of the turn.
When traveling around a curve, release the accelerator pedal
before entering the curve, shift down to a lower speed range, then
depress the accelerator pedal to travel around the curve. Never
coast around the curves at high speed.

REMARK
The angle of the steering wheel may change (the position of the
spoke may change slightly) when the machine is traveling, but
this is not a failure.
If force is applied to the steering wheel when the tires have been
turned fully to the left or right, the steering wheel will turn a little
at a time, but this is not a failure.

LOADING OPERATIONS
When using a large wheel loader to load large rocks, if the rocks are loaded directly into the dump body parts of the
dump body may be deformed. To prevent this, when loading large rocks, first load sand or soil to act as a cushion,
then load the rocks on top of this to reduce the impact on the dump body.
In addition, when loading rocks that exceed the following conditions, install the optional dump body reinforcement
plate.
Rocks with one side over 0.5 m (1 ft 8 in)
Rocks of hardness more than 4.5 (Mohs scale)
Rocks with a weight of more than 300 kg (662 lb)
When transporting steel ingots

NOTICE
When traveling, always set the dump lever to the FLOAT position regardless of whether the dump body is empty or loaded.
If the dump lever is not at the FLOAT position and the shift lever is not at the N position, the central warning lamp will flush and
the alarm buzzer will sound.

3 - 87
.

OPERATION OPERATION

DUMP OPERATIONS
WARNING
When dumping a load, always carry out the dumping operation in
accordance with the signals from the flagman.
When dumping large rocks, operate the dump body slowly.
Do not load the dump body while it is still raised.
When carrying out inspection with the dump body raised, always use
the safety pins, set the dump lever to the HOLD position and lock it
securely. For details, see "SAFETY PIN (PAGE 3-35)".

Operate the dump body as follows.


1. Place shift lever (1) at the N position, and set parking brake
valve lever (2) to the PARKING position.

2. Move dump lever (3) to the RAISE position, then depress the
accelerator pedal to raise the dump body.

If the dump lever is released when it is at the RAISE position,


it is held at the RAISE position and the dump body will continue
to rise.

The dumping speed increases in proportion to the engine


speed.

3. When the dump body rises to the previously set position (dump
body positioner adjustment position), dump lever (3) is
returned to the HOLD position. The dump body is then held at
that position.

If it is necessary to raise the dump body further, move dump


lever (3) back to the RAISE position and the dump body will
rise. If dump lever (3) is released when doing this, it will return
to the HOLD position and the dump body will stop at that
position.

3 - 88
.

OPERATION OPERATION

4. When dump lever (3) is moved to the LOWER position, the


dump body will start to move down.

5. When the dump body has moved down a certain distance,


move dump lever (3) to the FLOAT position. (When the lever is
released, it will return to the FLOAT position.) The dump body
will then move down under its own weight.
In the dump body raising operation, slow down the engine
speed when the dump body has risen near the maximum angle
to avoid any impact load on the hydraulic circuit or hoist
cylinders.

When the dump body has risen, the speed range is locked to
2nd if shift lever is at the D position. While traveling, lower the
dump body.

PRECAUTIONS FOR OPERATION


When traveling on roads in rain or snow, or when traveling on muddy or soft ground, consider the loaded condition
of the machine and be extremely careful not to let the tires slip or the machine spin and sink into the ground.
If the engine should stop when the machine is traveling, stop the machine immediately, then move the gear shift
lever to the N position, and start the engine again.
If the central warning lamp and pilot lamp for any EMERGENCY item on the machine monitor should flash and
the buzzer sounds during operation, stop the machine immediately and investigate the cause.
For details, see "TROUBLESHOOTING (PAGE 3-104)".
When loading, be careful to load the dump body uniformly, and be particularly careful to avoid loading too much
at the front.
On slippery road surfaces, apply the retarder control lever slowly and shift the transmission down to prevent the
rear wheels from locking.
When traveling through pools of water, water may get inside the front brakes and cause a big drop in the braking
force, so drive carefully in such areas. If water should get into the brakes, apply the brakes several times while
traveling to produce friction heat between the pad and disc to remove the water.

3 - 89
.

OPERATION OPERATION

PARKING MACHINE
WARNING
Avoid stopping suddenly. Give yourself ample room when stopping.
Park the machine on firm, horizontal ground.
Do not park the machine on a slope.
If it is unavoidably necessary to park the machine on a slope, put blocks
under the tires to prevent the machine from moving and set parking
brake valve lever to the PARKING position.
If the shift lever is touched by mistake, the machine may move
suddenly, and this may lead to a serious injury or death. Before leaving
the operator's compartment, always set the parking brake valve lever
securely to the PARKING position.
The retarder must not be used as a parking brake.
Do not use the retarder for long-term parking, regardless of the engine
speed.

CAUTION
To prevent damage to the parking brake, apply the parking brake only when
parking the machine.

1. Release accelerator pedal (1), then depress brake pedal (2) to


stop the machine.

2. Move shift lever (3) to the N position, then move parking brake
valve lever (4) to the PARKING position to apply the parking
brake.

3 - 90
.

OPERATION OPERATION

3. When in the operator's compartment, pull retarder control lever


(5) fully to apply the retarder.

NOTICE
The retarder must not be used as a parking brake.
Do not use the retarder for long-term parking, regardless of the engine
speed.

CHECKS AFTER COMPLETION OF WORK


Use the machine monitor to check the engine water temperature, engine oil pressure, and fuel level. If the engine
has overheated, do not stop the engine suddenly. Run it at a mid-range speed to cool it gradually before stopping.

DRAIN WATER FROM AIR TANK


1. After starting the engine, pull ring (1) of the tank drain valve to
drain the water from the tank.
2. Carry out the same operation after completing work.

NOTICE
In cold areas, there is danger of the water freezing, so drain the water from
the air tank after operations when it is still warm.

3 - 91
.

OPERATION OPERATION

LOCKING
Always lock the following places.
(1) Fuel filler cap of fuel tank
(2) Cab door (left, right)

REMARK
The starting switch key is used for locking places (1) and (2).

3 - 92
.

OPERATION OPERATION

HANDLING TIRES

PRECAUTIONS WHEN HANDLING TIRES


WARNING
To ensure safety, the defective tires given below must be replaced with
new tires.
Tires where the bead wire has been cut, broken, or greatly deformed
Excessively worn tires where more than 1/4 of the circumference of the
carcass ply (excluding the breaker) is exposed
Tires where damage to the carcass exceeds 1/3 of the tire width
Tires where ply separation has occurred
Tires where radial cracks extend to the carcass
Tires where there is abnormal deterioration, deformation, and damage,
and the tire cannot withstand use.

Please contact your Komatsu distributor when replacing the tires. It is dangerous to jack up the machine without
taking due care.

T.Km.P.H (Ton-Km-Per-Hour Rating)


Tires for construction equipment are used under severe conditions that bear no comparison with the tires used on
cars, buses, or ordinary trucks, so they are specially designed to withstand these conditions.

Compared with ordinary tires, far greater heat is produced in the rubber internal parts of off-road tires when the
machine is traveling. If they are used continuously under conditions which exceed the permitted load and travel
speed of the tire, the internal temperature will exceed the limit, and the rubber may become soft and heat separation
occur.

To prevent such problems from occurring, the T.Km.P.H. is used as a standard to allow the machine to travel safely.
If operations are carried out which exceed the T.Km.P.H. of the tire (when the T.Km.P.H. of the work exceeds the
T.Km.P.H. of the tires), tire trouble will occur more frequently. In such cases, do as follows.
Make the operating conditions easier so that the operation T.Km.P.H. of the work is lowered.
Increase the size of the tires to a tire with a high T.Km.P.H.

3 - 93
.

OPERATION OPERATION

TIRE T.Km.P.H.AND MAXIMUM SPEED FOR CONTINUOUS TRAVEL (REFERENCE)

Tire T.Km.P.H. for Max. speed for continuous travel for each ambient
ambient temperature temperature
16°C 27°C 38°C 49°C 16°C 27°C 38°C 49°C
Size: 27.00R49!! When empty
40 36 32 28
(standard) (front wheel standard)
648 580 513 445
Structure: GP When loaded
24 22 19 17
Code No.: E4 (TRA) (rear wheel standard)
Size: 27.00-49-48 PR When empty
31 29 27 25
(if equipped) (front wheel standard)
495 463 431 399
Structure: GP When loaded
Code No.: E4 (TRA) 19 17 16 15
(rear wheel standard)
Size: 27.00-49-48 PR When empty
24 22 21 19
(if equipped) (front wheel standard)
380 358 336 313
Structure: CR When loaded
Code No.: E4 (TRA) 14 13 12.6 12
(rear wheel standard)

METHOD OF CALCULATING WORK T.Km.P.H.


Work T.Km.P.H. = average load per tire x average travel speed for one day
Average travel speed = round trip distance x number of round trips per day/total operating hours per day
Average load = (load when empty + load when loaded) /2

The total operating hours per day includes the stopping time and rest periods.

* The T.Km.P.H. in the table may differ slightly according to the tire maker, so concerning operations which require
travel near the travel speed given in the table, consult your Komatsu distributor.

PRECAUTIONS FOR LONG DISTANCE TRAVEL


If the machine travels continuously at high speed for a long distance, there will be a marked increase in the
generation of heat in the tire. This may cause premature damage to the tire, so be careful of the following points.
Travel only when empty.
Check the tire inflation pressure before starting for the day when the tires are cold, and adjust to the following
inflation pressure.
Do not reduce the tire inflation pressure when traveling.

Tire size Inflation pressure


27.00R49!! (standard) 0.69 MPa (7.00 kgf/cm2, 99.4 PSI)
27.00-49-48PR (if equipped) 0.55 MPa (5.60 kgf/cm2, 79.52 PSI)

NOTICE
If the tires are used when the inflation pressure is less than the value given in the table above, the rim may be damaged.
Always keep the tire inflation pressure within +0 to +0.03 MPa (0.3 kgf/cm2, 4.3 PSI) of the value in the table above.

The maximum travel speed must be kept to less than 40 km/h (24.9 MPH). Stop for at least one hour for every
one hour of travel to allow the tires and other components to cool down.
Never travel with water or dry ballast in the tires.

3 - 94
.

OPERATION DETERMINING AND MAINTAINING TRAVEL ROAD

DETERMINING AND MAINTAINING TRAVEL ROAD


Determining and traveling the road in the jobsite is an extremely important factor both for reasons of safety and for
reducing the cycle time.To ensure safety in operations, do as follows.

DETERMINING TRAVEL ROAD


As far as possible, restrict the travel road to one-way travel.
If it is impossible to keep to one-way traffic, make the road with ample width to enable trucks traveling in opposite
directions to pass each other. If it is impossible to provide a sufficient road width, provide passing places at
various points along the road.
Always design the road so that the loaded truck passes on the side closest to the hill face.
If there are curves with poor visibility along the road, set up mirrors.
In places where the road shoulder is weak or likely to collapse, set up a sign at a point at least 1.5 m (4 ft 11 in)
from the road shoulder to warn of the danger.
It is important to set up lighting or reflectors to enable the road to be traveled at night.
The grade of slope should be kept within 10% (approx. 6°) as far as possible, and emergency escape points
should be set up on downhill slopes in case of any brake failure.
Make the road as straight as possible, and particularly in intermediate areas with curves, where the machine is
traveling at high speed, make the radius of the curve as large as possible.
Small S curves are particularly dangerous, so avoid such curves. The radius of the curve must be a minimum of
12 to 15 m (39 ft 4 in to 49 ft 3 in).
Make the radius of curves as large as possible.
Make the road wider at curves than it is in straight areas.
Make the outside of the curve slightly higher.
Be particularly careful to strengthen the road shoulder on the outside of curve.
As far as possible, design the road so that no other roads cross it. In particular, if roads cross at an angle on
slopes, a stepped difference is formed in the road. This is extremely dangerous, as it causes the machine to roll
when traveling at high speed.
Cut the slope face to provide a special road for the trucks.

MAINTAINING TRAVEL ROAD


Carry out the necessary action according to the conditions to insure that the road can always be traveled safely.
Remove any unevenness in the travel surface, sloping to the left or right, or drooping of the road shoulder. Make
the road of ample strength and remove such obstacles as rocks and tree stumps.
Maintain the road from time to time with a bulldozer or motor grader.
Spray the road with water at suitable intervals to prevent dust from rising and reducing the visibility.

3 - 95
.

TRANSPORTATION OPERATION

TRANSPORTATION
PRECAUTIONS WHEN TRANSPORTING
Always obey the traffic regulations when transporting the machine by road.

WARNING
This machine must be disassembled for transportation. When transporting the machine, please consult your Komatsu
distributor.

STEPS FOR TRANSPORTATION


As a basic rule, always transport the machine on a trailer.
When selecting the trailer, see the weights and dimensions given in "SPECIFICATIONS (PAGE 5-2)".
Note that the specifications for the weights and dimensions for transportation differ according to the type of tires and
type of dump body.

3 - 96
.

OPERATION TRANSPORTATION

METHOD OF SECURING MACHINE


After loading the machine in the specified position, secure it in place as follows.
1. Set the parking brake valve lever to the PARKING position to
apply the parking brake.

2. Turn the key in the starting switch to the OFF position to stop
the engine.

3. Remove the key from the starting switch.

4. To prevent the machine from moving during transportation,


insert blocks under the front and rear of each tire and secure
the machine firmly in position with chains or wire rope.
Be particularly careful to secure the machine firmly so that it
does not slide to the side.

NOTICE
Always retract the antenna and reassemble the mirrors so that they are
within the width of the machine.

3 - 97
.

TRANSPORTATION OPERATION

METHOD OF LIFTING MACHINE


When lifting the machine at a port or any other place, always use the following procedure to lift it.

WARNING
The operator carrying out the lifting operation using a crane must be a properly qualified crane operator.
Never raise the machine with any worker on it.
Always make sure that the wire rope is of ample strength for the weight of this machine.
When lifting, keep the machine horizontal.
Always stop the engine and apply the brake before starting the lifting operation.
Never enter the area around or under the machine when it is raised.

Never try to lift the machine in any posture other than the posture given in the procedure below or using lifting
equipment other than in the procedure below.
There is a hazard that the machine may lose its balance.

NOTICE
This method of lifting applies to the standard specification machine.
The method of lifting differs according to the attachments and options installed.
For details of the procedure for machines that are not the standard specification, please consult your Komatsu distributor.

For the weight of the standard specification machine, see "SPECIFICATIONS (PAGE 5-2)"

NOTICE
Use protectors to prevent the wire rope from being cut on sharp corners and to prevent the wire rope from cutting into the
machine bodywork.
When using a spreader bar, select an ample width to prevent contact with the machine.

Please consult your Komatsu distributor before carrying out lifting work.

3 - 98
.

OPERATION TRANSPORTATION

LIFTING PROCEDURE

Lifting work can be carried out only with machines displaying a lifting mark.
When carrying out the lifting operation, stop the machine on firm level ground, and do as follows.

1. Start the engine, set the dump lever to the FLOAT position, and
check that the body operation caution lamp goes out.

2. Stop the engine, apply the brake, and check that the area
around the operator's compartment is safe.

3. Select wire ropes, slings, spreader bars and other lifting


equipment to match the weight of the machine, and fit the wire
ropes to the lifting positions.

REMARK
The lifting positions for the machine differs according to the
conditions.
Machine with body:Positions (1) and (3)
Total:4 places (2 at front, 2 at rear)
Machine without body:Positions (1) and (2)
Total:4 places (2 at front, 2 at rear)

4. Fit protector blocks at the contact points between the lifting


equipment and the body to prevent damage to the King
equipment.

5. When the machine comes off the ground (raised 10 to 20


cm(3.9 to 7.9 in)), stop the lifting operation, check carefully that
the machine is balanced and that the wire ropes are not loose,
then continue the lifting operation slowly.

3 - 99
.

COLD WEATHER OPERATION OPERATION

COLD WEATHER OPERATION


PRECAUTIONS FOR LOW TEMPERATURE
If the temperature becomes low, it becomes difficult to start the engine, and the coolant may freeze, so do as follows.

FUEL AND LUBRICANTS


Change to fuel and oil with low viscosity for all components. For details of the specified visicosity, see
"RECOMMENDED FUEL, COOLANT, AND LUBRICANT (PAGE 4-9)".

COOLANT
WARNING
Antifreeze is toxic. Be careful not to get it into your eyes or on your skin. If it should get into your eyes or on your skin, wash
it off with large amounts of fresh water and see a doctor at once.
When changing the coolant or when handling coolant containing antifreeze that has been drained when repairing the radiator,
please contact your Komatsu distributor or request a specialist company to carry out the operation. Antifreeze is toxic. Do not
let it flow into drainage ditches or spray it onto the ground surface.
Antifreeze is flammable. Do not bring any flame close. Do not smoke when handling antifreeze.

NOTICE
Use Komatsu Supercoolant wherever available, or use permanent type antifreeze coolant.
Never use methanol, ethanol, or propanol-based antifreeze.
Do not use any water leakage prevention agent, either alone, or in combination with antifreeze.
Do not mix one brand of antifreeze with a different brand.

For details on the amount of antifreeze mixture and on when to change the coolant, see "CLEAN INSIDE OF
COOLING SYSTEM (PAGE 4-21)".

3 - 100
.

OPERATION COLD WEATHER OPERATION

BATTERY
WARNING
The battery generates flammable gas. Do not bring fire or sparks near the battery.
Battery electrolyte is dangerous. If it gets in your eyes or on your skin, wash it off with a large amount of water and consult a
doctor.
Battery electrolyte dissolves paint. If it gets on the bodywork, wash it off immediately with water.
If the battery electrolyte is frozen, do not charge the battery or start the engine with a different power source. There is danger
that the battery may explode.
Battery electrolyte is toxic. Do not let it flow into drainage ditches or spray it on to the ground surface.

When the ambient temperature drops, the capacity of the battery will also drop. If the battery charge ratio is low, the
battery electrolyte may freeze. Maintain the battery charge as close as possible to 100%. Insulate it against cold
temperature to ensure the machine can be started easily the next morning.
Measure the specific gravity and calculate the rate of charge from the following conversion table.

Electrolyte
Temperature
20 0 -10 -20
Charging (°C)
Rate (%)
100 1.28 1.29 1.30 1.31
90 1.26 1.27 1.28 1.29
80 1.24 1.25 1.26 1.27
75 1.23 1.24 1.25 1.26
When adding distilled water in cold weather, add it before starting operations in the morning to prevent the
electrolyte from freezing.

INSTALLATION OF RADIATOR CURTAIN


(If equipped)
If the engine water temperature gauge does not enter the green range, install a radiator curtain. The amount that the
radiator curtain is opened can be adjusted from fully closed, to one window open or two windows open. Adjust the
amount of opening according to the ambient temperature so that the engine water temperature gauge enters the
green range.

PRECAUTIONS AFTER COMPLETION OF WORK


To prevent mud, water, or the undercarriage from freezing and making it impossible for the machine to move on the
following morning, observe the following precautions.
Mud and water on the machine body should be completely removed. This is to prevent damage to the seal caused
by water in mud or dirt getting inside the seal and freezing.
Park the machine on hard, dry ground.
If this is impossible, park the machine on wooden boards.
The boards help protect the tires from being frozen in soil and the machine can start next morning.
Bleed the air from the tank to prevent moisture from collecting inside the tank.
Open the drain valve and drain any water collected in the fuel system to prevent it from freezing.
As the battery capacity drops markedly in low temperatures, cover the battery or remove it from the machine,
keep it in a warm place, and install it again the next morning.
If the electrolyte level is low, add distilled water in the morning before beginning work. Do not add water after the
day's work to prevent diluted electrolyte in the battery from freezing during the night.

3 - 101
.

COLD WEATHER OPERATION OPERATION

AFTER COLD WEATHER


When the season changes and the weather becomes warmer, do as follows.
Replace the fuel and oil for all parts with oil of the viscosity specified.
For details, see "RECOMMENDED FUEL, COOLANT, AND LUBRICANT (PAGE 4-9)".

3 - 102
.

OPERATION LONG-TERM STORAGE

LONG-TERM STORAGE
BEFORE STORAGE
When keeping in long-term storage (more than one month), store as follows.
After every part is washed and dried, house the machine in a dry building. Never leave it outdoors.
In case it is indispensable to leave it outdoors, park the machine on the flat ground and cover it with canvas etc.
Completely fill the fuel tank. This prevents moisture from collecting.
Lubricate and change the oil before storage.
Coat the exposed portion of the hydraulic cylinder piston rod with grease.
Disconnect the negative terminals of the battery and cover it or remove it from the machine and store it separately.
Lock the dump lever at the HOLD position with the safety lock, and apply the parking brake.
Set the tire inflation pressure for each tire to within the range of the specified inflation pressure for the type of tire.
Open the drain valve of the air tank, release the air, then tighten the drain valve again.
Push the retarder control lever forward to the OFF position.
Place the gear shift lever at the N position and turn the starting switch OFF.
To prevent corrosion, be sure to fill the cooling system with Supercoolant (AF-NAC) or permanent type antifreeze
(density between 30% and 68%).

DURING STORAGE
WARNING
If it is necessary to perform the rust-prevention operation while the machine is indoors, open the doors and windows to improve
ventilation and prevent gas poisoning.

Operate the engine and move the machine for a short distance once a month so that a new film of oil will be coated
over movable parts and component surfaces. At the same time, also charge the battery.
Before operating the work equipment, wipe off all the grease from hydraulic piston rods.

AFTER STORAGE
NOTICE
If the machine has been stored without carrying out the monthly rust-prevention operation, consult your Komatsu distributor
before using it.

When using the machine after long-term storage, do as follows before using it.
Wipe off the grease from the hydraulic cylinder rods.
Add oil and grease at all lubrication points.
When the machine is stored for a long period, moisture in the air will mix with the oil. Check the oil before and after
starting the engine. If there is water in the oil, change all the oil.

PRECAUTIONS BEFORE TRAVELING AFTER LONG-TERM STORAGE


1. Check all the oil and water levels before traveling.
2. When traveling after long-term storage, travel forward at a speed of 10 to 15 km/h (6.2 to 9.3 MPH) for 5 minutes
or 1 km to run the machine in, then change to normal travel.

3 - 103
.

TROUBLESHOOTING OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING
AFTER RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
When starting after running out of fuel, fill with fuel, then bleed the air from the fuel system before starting.
For details of the method of bleeding the air, see REPLACE FUEL FILTER CARTRIDGE (PAGE 4-55).

METHOD OF TOWING MACHINE


WARNING
Injury or death could result if a disabled machine is towed incorrectly or if
there is a mistake in the selection of the wire rope or drawbar.
Always confirm that the wire rope or drawbar used for towing has ample
strength for the weight of the machine being towed.
Never use a wire rope which has cut strands (A), reduced diameter (B),
or kinks (C). There is danger that the rope may break during the towing
operation.
Always wear leather gloves when handling wire rope.
Never tow a machine on a slope.
Never go between the towing machine and the towed machine during
the towing operation.
If the machine moves suddenly, a load is applied suddenly to the towing
wire or drawbar, and the towing wire or drawbar may break. Move the
machine gradually to a constant speed.
Be extremely careful if there is a failure in the engine or brake system:
the brakes will not work.
If the steering and the brakes on the disabled machine cannot be
operated, do not let anyone ride on the disabled machine.

NOTICE
The permissible towing capacity for this machine is 491935N (50163 kg). Do not tow any load greater than this.
Towing is only permitted in order to move a disabled machine to a place where it is possible to carry out inspection and
maintenance. It must not be towed for long distances.
Please consult your Komatsu distributor for information about towing a disabled machine.

3 - 104
.

OPERATION TROUBLESHOOTING

This machine must not be towed except in emergencies. When towing the machine, take the following precautions.
When towing a machine, tow it at a low speed of less than 2 km/h (1.2 MPH), and for a distance of a few meters
to a place where repairs can be carried out. The machine should be towed only in emergencies. If the machine
must be moved long distances, use a transporter.
Use a towing machine of the same class as the machine being towed.
Check that the towing machine has ample braking power, weight, and rimpull to allow it to control both machines
on slopes or on the tow road.
Use the specified hook for both the towing machine and the machine being towed.
To protect the operator if the towing wire or towing bar breaks, install protective plates on both the towing machine
and the machine being towed.
There are towing hooks installed to the bottom of the front frame and to the rear axle. Do not use any other place
as a towing hook.
When fitting the towing wire, check the condition of the hook to make sure that there is no problem.
Keep the angle of the towing wire as small as possible.
Keep the angle between the center lines of the two machines to within 30 degrees.
Towing may be carried out under various differing conditions, so it is impossible to determine beforehand the
requirements for towing.
Towing on flat horizontal roads will require the minimum rimpull, while towing on slopes or on uneven road
surfaces will require the maximum rimpull.
If the pressure in the air tank has dropped abnormally because of leakage of air from the air circuit, the parking
brake and emergency brake are applied, so release both brakes before towing the machine.
Before releasing the parking brake, always put blocks under all four wheels. If the wheels are not blocked, there
is danger that the machine may move.
Connect with the towing wire or drawbar, and remove the blocks from the wheels when the disabled machine is
in a condition where it cannot run away.
When carrying out the operation to release the parking brake, check that the surrounding area is safe.
If the parking brake is released, the brakes will not work, so pay careful attention to safety.
When towing down a slope, use two towing machines. One machine should be uphill from the disabled machine
and should be connected with towing wire or a drawbar to pull the disabled machine back and keep it stable. The
other machine should tow the disabled machine downhill.

3 - 105
.

TROUBLESHOOTING OPERATION

WHEN ENGINE RUNS

If the transmission and steering wheel can be operated, and the engine is running, it is possible to tow the
machine out of mud or to move it for a short distance to the edge of the road.
Check the effect of the brakes, and if the brakes do not work properly, take the action given in "When engine does
not run".
Check if it is possible to steer the machine. If the machine cannot be steered, follow the procedure given in
"WHEN ENGINE DOES NOT RUN".
The operator should sit on the machine being towed and operate the steering in the direction that the machine
is towed.
Always run the engine to allow the steering and brakes to be used.

WHEN ENGINE DOES NOT RUN

The brakes will not work, so be extremely careful.


Connect the towing machine securely to the towed machine. Use two towing machines of the same class or
larger than the machine being towed: connect one machine each to the front and rear of the machine being towed.
If it is necessary to change the direction of the machine being towed, it is possible to use the emergency steering,
but it can be used for a maximum of only 90 seconds.
If the emergency steering cannot be used, disconnect two hydraulic hoses each on the left and right from the
steering cylinders, then carry out the towing operation. When removing the hoses, block the hoses with plugs and
fit oil containers to the mouthpiece of the cylinder to prevent oil from draining to the ground.

3 - 106
.

OPERATION TROUBLESHOOTING

RELEASE METHOD WHEN PARKING BRAKE AND EMERGENCY BRAKE HAVE BEEN ACTUATED
IN EMERGENCY
If the pressure in the air tank has dropped abnormally because of leakage of air from the air circuit, the parking brake
and emergency brake are applied automatically. After emergency actuation of the brakes, if they are not released,
release the brakes as follows.

METHOD OF RELEASING PARKING BRAKE

Please ask your Komatsu distributor to release the parking brake.

WARNING
If there is a failure in the air circuit, the brakes will not work. It is dangerous to drive the machine in this condition, so always
tow the machine at low speed. When towing, run the engine so that it is possible to steer the machine.
When releasing the parking brake, carry out the operation on flat ground and check that the surrounding area is safe. If the
parking brake must be released on a slope because of an emergency or some other unavoidable reason, put blocks under the
wheels before releasing the brake.

After emergency actuation of the parking brake, if the parking brake is not released even when the parking brake
valve lever is placed at the TRAVEL position, release the parking brake as follows.
1. Remove air charge socket (1) installed to the front air tank.

2. Remove the air hose from parking brake chamber (2), then
install removed socket (1) to chamber (2).
3. Install one end of air charge hose (3) (supplied with the
machine) to air charge socket (1). (The hose and socket can be
installed at a touch.)
4. Push the other end of air charge hose (3) into valve (4) of the
tire. Air is supplied to the parking brake chamber, and the
parking brake is released.

5. When the parking brake is released, tow the machine immediately to a safe position. For details of the method
of towing, see "METHOD OF TOWING MACHINE (PAGE 3-104)".

3 - 107
.

TROUBLESHOOTING OPERATION

METHOD OF RELEASING EMERGENCY BRAKE

Please ask your Komatsu distributor to release the emergency brake.

WARNING
When the emergency brake has been actuated, never drive the machine. This will cause burning out of the brake disc or lining,
or failure of the torque converter or transmission.
When releasing the air pressure from the emergency brake tank, check that the surrounding area is safe, and always put blocks
under the tires before starting the operation.

After actuation of the emergency brake, if the emergency brake is not released when the emergency brake lever is
placed at the TRAVEL position, release the emergency brake as follows.
1. When the preparations for towing the machine are completed,
pull rings (1) of the air tank drain valve (4 places), and release
the air pressure to release the emergency brake.
2. After releasing the emergency brake, release rings (1).

3 - 108
.

OPERATION TROUBLESHOOTING

IF BATTERY IS DISCHARGED
WARNING
It is dangerous to charge a battery when mounted on a machine. Make sure that it is dismounted before charging.
When checking or handling the battery, stop the engine and turn the starting switch key to the OFF position.
The battery generates hydrogen gas, so there is a hazard of explosion. Do not bring lighted cigarettes near the battery, or do
anything that will cause sparks.
Battery electrolyte is dilute sulfuric acid, and it will attack your clothes and skin. If it gets on your clothes or on your skin,
immediately wash it off with a large amount of water. If it gets in your eyes, wash it out with fresh water and consult a doctor.
When handling batteries, always wear safety glasses and rubber gloves.
When removing the battery, first disconnect the cable from the ground (normally the negative (-) terminal). When installing,
install the positive (+) terminal first.
If a tool touches the positive terminal and the chassis, there is danger that it will cause a spark, so be extremely careful.
If the terminals are loose, there is danger that the defective contact may generate sparks that will cause an explosion.
When removing or installing the terminals, check which is the positive (+) terminal and which is the negative (-) terminal.

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF BATTERY


Before removing the battery, remove the ground cable (normally
connected to the negative (-) terminal).
If any tool touches between the positive terminal and the
chassis, there is a hazard of sparks being generated.

When installing the battery, connect the ground cable last.

3 - 109
.

TROUBLESHOOTING OPERATION

PRECAUTIONS FOR CHARGING BATTERY

CHARGING BATTERY WHEN MOUNTED ON MACHINE


When charging the battery, if the battery is not handled correctly,
there is danger that the battery may explode. Always follow the
instructions in "IF BATTERY IS DISCHARGED (PAGE 3-109)"
and the instruction manual accompanying the charger, and do as
follows.
Set the voltage of the charger to match the voltage of the battery
to be charged. If the correct voltage is not selected, the charger
may overheat and cause an explosion.
Connect the positive (+) charger clip of the charger to the
positive (+) terminal of the battery, then connect the negative (-)
charger clip of the charger to the negative (-) terminal of the
battery. Be sure to attach the clips securely.
Set the charging current to 1/10 of the value of the rated battery
capacity; when carrying out rapid charging, set it to less than the
rated battery capacity.
If the charger current is too high, the electrolyte will leak or dry
up, and this may cause the battery to catch fire and explode.
If the battery electrolyte is frozen, do not charge the battery or start the engine with a different power source.
There is a danger that this will ignite the battery electrolyte and cause the battery to explode.
Do not use or charge the battery if the battery electrolyte level is below the LOWER LEVEL line. This may cause
an explosion. Check the battery electrolyte level periodically and add distilled water to bring the electrolyte level
to the UPPER LEVEL line.

3 - 110
.

OPERATION TROUBLESHOOTING

STARTING ENGINE WITH BOOSTER CABLE


When starting the engine with a booster cable, do as follows:

PRECAUTIONS WHEN CONNECTING AND DISCONNECTING BOOSTER CABLE

WARNING
When connecting the cables, never contact the positive (+) and negative
(-) terminals.
When starting the engine with a booster cable, wear safety glasses and
rubber gloves.
Be careful not to let the normal machine and problem machine contact
each other. This prevents sparks from generating near the battery which
could ignite the hydrogen gas given off by the battery.
Make sure that there is no mistake in the booster cable connections.
The final connection is to the engine block of the problem machine, but
sparks will be generated when this is done, so connect to a place as far
as possible from the battery.
When disconnecting the booster cable, take care not to bring the clips
in contact with each other or with the machine body.

NOTICE
The size of the booster cable and clip should be suitable for the battery size.
The battery of the normal machine must be the same capacity as that of the problem machine.
Check the cables and clips for damage or corrosion.
Make sure that the cables and clips are firmly connected.

CONNECTING THE BOOSTER CABLES


Keep the starting switch of the normal machine and problem machine in the OFF position.
Connect the booster cable as follows, in the order of the numbers marked in the diagram.
1. Connect one clip of booster cable (A) to the positive (+)
terminal of the problem machine.
2. Connect the other clip of booster cable (A) to the positive (+)
terminal of the normal machine.
3. Connect one clip of booster cable (B) to the negative (-)
terminal of the normal machine.
4. Connect the other clip of booster cable (B) to the engine block
of the problem machine.

3 - 111
.

TROUBLESHOOTING OPERATION

STARTING THE ENGINE

CAUTION
Make sure that the parking brake valve lever is at PARKING position and the shift lever is at N (neutral) position for both normal
machine and the problem machine.

1. Make sure the clips are firmly connected to the battery terminals.
2. Start engine of the normal machine and run it at high idle speed.
3. Turn the starting switch of the problem machine to the START position and start the engine.
If the engine doesn't start at first, try again after 2 minutes or so.

DISCONNECTING THE BOOSTER CABLES


After the engine has started, disconnect booster cables in the reverse order in which they were connected.
1. Remove one clip of booster cable (B) from the engine block of
the problem machine.
2. Remove the other clip of booster cable (B) from the negative (-)
terminal of the normal machine.
3. Remove one clip of booster cable (A) from the positive (+)
terminal of the normal machine.
4. Remove the other clip of booster cable (A) from the positive (+)
terminal of the problem machine.

3 - 112
.

OPERATION TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHER TROUBLE

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
( ): Always contact your Komatsu distributor when dealing with these items.
In cases of problems or causes which are not listed below, contact your Komatsu distributor for repairs.

Problem Main causes Remedy


Lamp does not glow brightly even Defective wiring ( Check, repair loose terminals,
when engine runs at high speed disconnections)
Insufficient battery charge Charge, add distilled water
Lamp flickers while engine is Defective adjustment of belt Adjusst altenator belt tension
running tension See EVERY 250 HOURS
SERVICE.
Charge monitor lights up while Defective alternator ( Replace)
running is engine Defective wiring ( Check, repair)
Abnormal noise is generated from Defective alternator ( Replace)
alternator
Starting motor does not turn when Defective wiring ( Check, repair)
starting switch is turned to START Defective starting switch ( Replace switch)
Insufficient battery charge Charge
Defective batteery switch ( Replace switch)
Starting motor turns engine Defective wiring ( Check, repair)
sluggishly Insufficient battery charge Charge
Starting motor disengages before Defective wiring ( Check, repair)
engine starts Insufficient battery charge Charge

3 - 113
.

TROUBLESHOOTING OPERATION

CHASSIS
( ): Always contact your Komatsu distributor when dealing with these items.
In cases of problems or causes which are not listed below, contact your Komatsu distributor for repairs.

Problem Main causes Remedy


Torque converter oil temperature Leakage of oil or entry of air due ( Check, repair)
monitor lamp flashes to damage or defective tightening
of oil pipe, pipe joint
Wear, scuffing of gear pump ( Check, repair)
Insufficient oil in transmission Add oil to specified level. See
case CHECK BEFORE STARTING.
Loose fan belt Replace belt. See EVERY 500
HOURS SERVICE.
Clogged oil cooler ( Clean or replace)
Long distance traveled in torque Drive in direct range
converter range
Disconnected,broken wiring to ( Repair, connect wiring)
sensor
Steering wheel is heavy Lack of grease at link Add grease
Internal leakage inside steering ( Replace cylinder seal)
cylinder
Steering wheel pulls Tire inflation pressure not Make tire inflation pressure
uniform on left and right uniform. See CHECK BEFORE
STARTING.
Dragging, pulling of front brake Check wear of front brake pad.
For details, see EVERY 500
HOURS SERVICE.
Braking effect is poor when brake Pad has reached wear limit ( Replace pad)
pedal is depressed Rear disc has reached wear limit ( Replace disc)
Insufficient air pressure Charge to specified pressure
Insufficient brake oil Add brake oil. See CHECK
Brake pulls to one side BEFORE STARTING.
Air in brake circuit Bleed air. See WHEN
REQUIRED.
Dump body speed is slow Defective gear pump ( Replace gear pump)
Insufficient oil Add oil to specified level. See
CHECK BEFORE STARTING.
Entry of soil or sand due to ( Replace U-packing)
Suspension is hard
breakage of dust seal, gas
leakage due to breakage of
U-packing
Gas leaking from valve core ( Replace valve core)
Rear wheel on one side tends to Air in rear brake circuit (between Bleed air from rear brakes (left,
slip slack adjuster and rear brake) right). See WHEN REQUIRED.
Excessive difference in wear ( Replace tires)
between left and right tires
Excessive difference in division Make load uniform
of load between left and right
wheels (unbalanced load)
Excessive deformation of disc ( Disassemble and adjust brake)

3 - 114
.

OPERATION TROUBLESHOOTING

IF ACCELERATOR PEDAL HAS FAILED


In addition to the potentiometer detecting the pedal depression depth, the check switch is installed on the
accelerator pedal assembly in order to detect whether the accelerator pedal is depressed or not.

If the pedal depression depth is not detected correctly due to a failure of the accelerator pedal or incorrect electric
wiring, the engine controller or PMC (if equipped) controls the engine speed responding to the signal from this check
switch. The engine runs at 1400 rpm when the accelerator pedal is depressed, while the engine runs at low idling
when the pedal is released. The engine speed varies depending on the load.

After moving the machine to a safe place by operating the accelerator pedal, check the service code, then contact
your Komatsu distributor for repairs.

There are two methods when operating the accelerator pedal: either release the pedal and set to the OFF (low idling)
position, or depress the pedal fully (1400 rpm).
If the accelerator pedal is held at an intermediate position, the system may not be able to judge if the accelerator
pedal is being operated or not.

REMARK
If the engine controller or PMC (if equipped) can not receive the signal of the accelerator pedal depth, the central
warning lamp flashes and simultaneously the alarm buzzer sounds and user code 02 appears.

3 - 115
.

TROUBLESHOOTING OPERATION

ENGINE
( ): Always contact your Komatsu distributor when dealing with these items.
In cases of problems or causes which are not listed below, contact your Komatsu distributor for repairs.

Problem Main causes Remedy


Engine oil pressure monitor lights Insufficient oil in oil pan Add oil to specified level. See
up CHECK BEFORE STARTING.
Clogged oil filter cartridge Replace cartridge, see EVERY
500 HOURS SERVICE
Oil leakage due to damage ( Check, repair)
caused by defective tightening of
oil pan, pipe joint
Disconnection, broken wiring to ( Repair, connect wiring)
sensor
Steam spurts out from top of Insufficient coolant, water leakage Check, add cooling water. See
radiator (pressure valve) CHECK BEFORE STARTING.
Loose fan belt Replace belt. See EVERY
500 HOURS SERVICE.
Radiator cooling water level Dirt or scale accumulated in Change coolant, clean inside of
monitor lights up cooling system cooling system. See WHEN
REQUIRED.
Radiator fins clogged or damaged Clean or repair. See EVERY 500
Water temperature gauge is in red HOURS SERVICE.
range Defective water temperature ( Replace water temperature
gauge gauge)
Defective thermostat ( Replace thermostat)
Engine water temperature monitor Defective thermostat seal ( Replace thermostat seal)
flashes Loose radiator filler cap Tighten or replace cap.
Disconnection, broken wiring to ( Repair, connect wiring)
sensor
Water temperature gauge display Defective water temperature ( Replace water temperature
stays at lowest level and does not gauge monitor gauge monitor)
rise Defective thermostat ( Replace thermostat)
In cold weather, cold wind is ( Install radiator curtain)
blowing strongly against engine
Engine does not start even when Insufficient fuel Add fuel. See CHECK BEFORE
starting motor is cranked STARTING.
Air in fuel system ( Repair place where air is leaking
in)
No fuel in fuel filter Fill filter with fuel. See EVERY
500 HOURS SERVICE.
Starting motor cranks engine too See electrical components
slowly
Starting motor does not turn See electrical components
Defective valve clearance ( Adjust valve clearance)
(defective compression)
Fuel stops from time to time Crushed fuel tank breather tube ( Replace breather tube)

3 - 116
.

OPERATION TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Main causes Remedy


Excessive oil consumption Oil leakage ( Check, repair)
Excessive oil in oil pan Add oil to specified level. See
CHECK BEFORE STARTING.
Exhaust gas is white or bluish Worn piston, ring, cylinder liner ( Replace)
Improper fuel Replace with specified fuel
Defective turbocharger seal ( Check, replace)
Exhaust gas is black Clogged air cleaner element Clean or replace.
See WHEN REQUIRED.
Worn piston, ring, cylinder liner ( Check, repair)
Defective compression See adjustment of clearance
above
Defective turbocharger ( Check, replace)
Defective exchaust brake ( Check, replace, repair)
Engine hunts Air entering suction side of fuel ( Repair place where air is leaking
line in)
There is "breathing sound" in Nozzle defect ( Replace nozzle)
combustion.
There is knocking (combustion or Poor quality fuel being used Replace with specified fuel
mechanical) Overheating See "water temperature gauge is
in red range" above.

3 - 117
.

TROUBLESHOOTING OPERATION

SERVICE CODE
If any abnormality occurs, stop the machine, apply the parking brake and check the service code, then contact your
Komatsu distributor for repairs.

If user code appears, check as follows:


1. Stop the machine safely and apply the parking brake.
2. While the user code is displayed, continue to depress check switch (1) for the caution pilot lamp bulb.
3. If the service code indicating possible cause is displayed on speedometer (2) and user code display (3), release
the check switch for caution pilot lamp bulb and check the service code.
Immediately after checking the service code, stop the engine.
4. After checking the service code, contact your Komatsu distributor for repairs.

REMARK
Upper 2 digits are displayed on speedometer (2); and lower 2 digits are displayed on user code display (3).
First 1 digits is in English letter; next 3 digits are numerical.
After the display of service code for 3 seconds, the display returns to normal. If multiple failures occur
simultaneously, each service code shows up for 3 seconds one by one.

3 - 118
.

OPERATION TROUBLESHOOTING

TRANSMISSION CONTROLLER
If any abnormality occurs in the transmission, reduce the travel
speed by using the brake, stop the machine on a safe place. Gear
shifting may not work for some failure modes.

If necessary, move the shift lever to the N position, remove


emergency escape connector (1) (connector No. A-1, A-2, black
1-pin connector) and insert again, then operate the shift lever to
move the machine without depressing the accelerator pedal.

If the shift lever is operated with the accelerator pedal depressed,


the emergency escape function will not work. Furthermore, the
emergency escape function may also not work for some failure
modes.

While the emergency escape function is working, the shift indicator


of machine monitor panel alternately displays E and transmission
shift range.

PAYLOAD METER (PRINTER TYPE)


Once an error has been displayed, it continues to be displayed in
display unit (2) until CAL switch (1) is pressed. If the controller
detects one of the abnormalities in the above table, all the external
display lamps light up.

3 - 119
.

4-1
.

GUIDES TO MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE

GUIDES TO MAINTENANCE
Do not perform any inspection and maintenance operation that is not found in this manual.

CHECK SERVICE METER:


Check the service meter reading every day to see if the time has come for any necessary maintenance to be
performed.

KOMATSU GENUINE REPLACEMENT PARTS:


Use Komatsu genuine parts specified in the Parts Book as replacement parts.

KOMATSU GENUINE OILS:


Use Komatsu genuine oils and grease. Choose oils and grease with proper viscosities specified for ambient
temperature.

ALWAYS USE CLEAN WASHER FLUID:


Use automobile window washer fluid, and be careful not to let any dirt get into it.

ALWAYS USE CLEAN OIL AND GREASE:


Use clean oil and grease. Also, keep the containers of the oil and grease clean. Keep foreign materials away from
oil and grease.

CHECKING FOREIGN MATERIALS IN DRAINED OIL AND ON FILTERS:


After oil is changed or filters are replaced, check the old oil and filters for metal particles and foreign materials. If large
quantity of metal particles or foreign materials are found, always report to the person in charge, and carry out
suitable action.

OIL CHANGE:
If your machine is equipped with a fuel strainer, do not remove it while fueling.

WELDING INSTRUCTIONS:
Turn off the engine starting switch.
Do not apply more than 200 V continuously.
Connect grounding cable within 1 m (3.3 ft) of the area to be welded. If grounding cable is connected near
instruments, connectors, etc., the instruments may malfunction.
If a seal or bearing happens to come between the part being welded and grounding point, change the grounding
point to avoid such parts.
Do not use the area around the hydraulic cylinders as the grounding point.
Sparks will cause damage to the plated portion.

DO NOT DROP THINGS INSIDE MACHINE:


When opening inspection windows or the oil filler port of the tank to carry out inspection, be careful not to drop
nuts, bolts, or tools inside the machine.
If such things are dropped inside the machine, it may cause damage and/or malfunction of the machine, and will
lead to failure. If you drop anything inside the machine, always remove it immediately.
Do not put unnecessary things in your pockets. Carry only things which are necessary for inspection.

4-2
.

MAINTENANCE GUIDES TO MAINTENANCE

DUSTY WORKSITES:
When working at dusty worksites, do as follows:
Inspect the air cleaner clogging monitor frequently to see if the air cleaner is clogged.
Clean the air cleaner element at a shorter interval than specified.
Clean the radiator core frequently to avoid clogging.
Clean and replace the fuel filter frequently.
Clean electrical components, especially the starting motor and alternator, to avoid accumulation of dust.
When inspecting or changing the oil, move the machine to a place that is free of dust to prevent dirt from getting
into the oil.

AVOID MIXING OILS:


If a different brand or grade of oil has to be added, drain the old oil and replace all the oil with the new brand or grade
of oil. Never mix different brand or grade of oil.

LOCKING INSPECTION COVERS:


Lock inspection cover securely into position with the lock bar. If inspection or maintenance is performed with
inspection cover not locked in position, there is a danger that it may be suddenly blow shut by the wind and cause
injury to the worker.

BLEEDING AIR FROM HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT:


If the hydraulic components have been repaired or replaced and if the hydraulic hoses, pipes, etc. have been
disconnected, it is necessary to bleed air in the circuit. See "WHEN REQUIRED (PAGE 4-19)".

PRECAUTIONS WHEN INSTALLING HYDRAULIC HOSES:


When removing parts at locations where there are O-rings or gasket seals, clean the mounting surface, and
replace with new parts.
When doing this, be careful not to forget to assemble the O-rings and gaskets.
When installing the hoses, do not twist them or bend them sharply. If they are installed so, their service life will
be shortened extremely and they may be damaged.

CHECKS AFTER INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE:


If you forget to perform the checks after inspection and maintenance, unexpected problems may occur, and this may
lead to serious injury or property damage. Always do the following:
Checks after operation (with engine stopped)
Have any inspection and maintenance points been forgotten?
Have all inspection and maintenance items been performed correctly?
Have any tools or parts been dropped inside the machine? It is particularly dangerous if parts are dropped
inside the machine and get caught in the lever linkage mechanism.
Are there any leakage of coolant or oil? Have all nuts and bolts been tightened?
Check when the engine is running
See "TWO WORKERS FOR MAINTENANCE WHEN ENGINE IS RUNNING (PAGE 2-29)" in the section on
safety for checking when the engine is running. Pay enough attention for safety.
Check if the inspected and serviced area is normally operated.
Increase the engine speed to check for the leak of fuel and oil.

4-3
.

OUTLINE OF SERVICE MAINTENANCE

OUTLINE OF SERVICE
Always use Komatsu genuine parts for replacement parts, grease or oil.
When changing the oil or adding oil, do not mix different types of oil. When changing the type of oil, drain all the
old oil and fill completely with the new oil. Always replace the filter at the same time. (There is no problem if the
small amount of oil remaining in the piping mixes with the new oil.)
Unless otherwise specified, when the machine is shipped from the factory, it is filled with the oil and coolant listed
in the table below.

Item Type
Engine oil pan Engine oil EO15W40DH (Komatsu genuine parts)
Transmission case Power train oil TO30 (Komatsu genuine parts)
Front brake oil tank
Hydraulic tank
Steering,hoist oil tank
Power train oil TO10 (Komatsu genuine parts)
Rear brake cooling oil tank
Front suspension
Rear suspension
Differential case
Power train oil TO30 (Komatsu genuine parts)
Final drive case
Radiator Supercoolant AF-NAC (Density:30% or above)(Komatsu genuine parts)

HANDLING OIL, FUEL, COOLANT, AND PERFORMING OIL CLINIC

OIL
Oil is used in the engine and hydraulic equipment under extremely severe conditions (high temperature, high
pressure), and deteriorates with use.
Always use oil that matches the grade and maximum and minimum ambient temperatures recommended in the
Operation and Maintenance Manual. Even if the oil is not dirty, always change the oil at the specified interval.
Oil corresponds to blood in the human body, always be careful when handling it to prevent any impurities (water,
metal particles, dirt, etc.) from getting in.
The majority of problems with the machine are caused by the entry of such impurities.
Take particular care not to let any impurities get in when storing or adding oil.
Never mix oils of different grades or brands.
Always add the specified amount of oil.
Having too much oil or too little oil are both causes of problems.
If the oil in the work equipment is not clear, there is probably water or air getting into the circuit. In such cases,
please contact your Komatsu distributor.
When changing the oil, always replace the related filters at the same time.
We recommend you have an analysis made of the oil periodically to check the condition of the machine. For
those who wish to use this service, please contact your Komatsu distributor.
When using commercially available oil, it may be necessary to reduce the oil change interval.
We recommend that you use the Komatsu oil clinic to carry out a detailed checks of the characteristics of the oil.

4-4
.

MAINTENANCE OUTLINE OF SERVICE

FUEL
To prevent the moisture in the air from condensing and forming water inside the fuel tank, always fill the fuel tank
after completing the day's work.
The fuel pump is a precision instrument, and if fuel containing water or dirt is used, it cannot work properly.
Be extremely careful not to let impurities get in when storing or adding fuel.
Always use the fuel specified in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Fuel may congeal depending on the temperature when it is used (particularly in low temperatures below -15°C
(5°F)), so it is necessary to use the fuel that is suitable for the temperature.
Before starting the engine, or when 10 minutes have passed after adding fuel, drain the sediment and water from
the fuel tank.
If the engine runs out of fuel, or if the filters have been replaced, it is necessary to bleed the air from the circuit.
If there is any foreign material in the fuel tank, wash the tank and fuel system.

COOLANT AND WATER FOR DILUTION


The coolant has the important function of preventing corrosion as well as preventing freezing.
Even in the areas where freezing is not an issue, the use of antifreeze coolant is essential.
Komatsu machines are supplied with Komatsu Supercoolant (AF-NAC). Komatsu Supercoolant (AF-NAC) has
excellent anticorrosion, antifreeze and cooling properties and can be used continuously for 2 years or 4000 hours.
Komatsu Supercoolant (AF-NAC) is strongly recommended wherever available.
When diluting the antifreeze coolant, use distilled water or tap water (soft water).
Natural water, such as a river water or well water (hard water), contains large amounts of minerals (calcium,
magnesium, etc.), and this makes it easier for scale to form inside the engine or radiator. Once scale is deposited
inside the engine or radiator, it is extremely difficult to remove. It also causes overheating due to poor heat
exchange, so when you dilute the coolant, we recommend that you use water with an overall hardness of less
than 100 PPM.
When using antifreeze, always observe the precautions given in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Antifreeze coolant is flammable, so be sure to keep it away from flame.
The ratio of Supercoolant (AF-NAC) to water differs according to the ambient temperature.
For details of the ratio when mixing, see "CLEAN INSIDE OF COOLING SYSTEM (PAGE 4-21)".
Supercoolant (AF-NAC) may be supplied already mixed. In such cases, never dilute with water.
If the engine overheats, wait for the engine to cool before adding coolant.
If the coolant level is low, it will cause overheating, and will also cause problems with corrosion due to air entering
the coolant.

GREASE
Grease is used to prevent seizure and noises at the joints.
This construction equipment is used under heavy-duty conditions. Always use the recommended grease and
follow the change intervals and recommended ambient temperatures given in this Operation and Maintenance
Manual.
The nipples not included in the maintenance section are nipples for overhaul, so they do not need grease.
If any part becomes stiff after being used for long time, add grease.
Always wipe off all of the old grease that is pushed out when greasing.
Be particularly careful to wipe off the old grease in places where sand or dirt sticking in the grease would cause
wear of the rotating parts.

4-5
.

OUTLINE OF SERVICE MAINTENANCE

CARRYING OUT KOWA (Komatsu Oil Wear Analysis)


KOWA is a maintenance service that makes it possible to prevent machine failures and downtime. With KOWA, the
oil is periodically sampled and analyzed. This enables early detection of wear of the machine drive parts and other
problems.
We strongly recommend you to use this service. The oil analysis is carried out at actual cost, so the cost is low, and
the results of the analysis are reported together with recommendations which will reduce repair costs and machine
downtime.

KOWA ANALYSIS ITEMS


Measurement of density of metal wear particles
This uses an ICP (Inductively Coupled Plasma) analyzer to
measure the density of iron, copper, and other metal wear
particles in the oil.

Measurement of quantity of particles


This uses a particle quantifier index measurement machine to
measure the quantity of iron particles of 5µ or more, enabling
early detection of failures.

Others
Measurements are made of items such as the ratio of water in the oil, density of the antifreeze coolant, ratio of
fuel in the oil, and dynamic viscosity, enabling a highly precise diagnosis of the machine's health.

OIL SAMPLING
Sampling interval
250 hours: Engine
500 hours: Other components

Precautions when sampling


Make sure that the oil is well mixed before sampling.
Perform sampling at regular fixed intervals.
Do not perform sampling on rainy or windy days when water or dust can get into the oil.

For further details of KOWA, please contact your Komatsu distributor.

4-6
.

MAINTENANCE OUTLINE OF SERVICE

STORING OIL AND FUEL


Keep indoors to prevent any water, dirt, or other impurities from getting in.
When keeping drum cans for a long period, put the drum on its side so that the filler port of the drums is at the side
to prevent moisture from being sucked in.
If drums have to be stored outside, cover them with a waterproof sheet or take other measures to protect them.
To prevent any change in quality during long-term storage, be sure to use in the order of first in - first out (use the
oldest oil or fuel first).

FILTERS
Filters are extremely important safety parts. They prevent impurities in the fuel and air circuits from entering
important equipment and causing problems.
Replace all filters periodically. For details, see the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
However, when working in severe conditions, replace the filters at shorter intervals according to the oil and fuel
(sulfur content) being used.
Never try to clean the filters (cartridge type) and use them again. Always replace with new filters.
When replacing oil filters, check if any metal particles are attached to the old filter. If any metal particles are found,
contact your Komatsu distributor.
When replacing the engine oil filter, fill the new filter with the specified clean oil, then install it.
Do not open packs of spare filters until just before they are to be used.
Use of Komatsu genuine filter elements is strongly recommended.

OUTLINE OF ELECTRIC SYSTEM


It is extremely dangerous if the electrical equipment becomes wet or the covering of the wiring is damaged. This
will cause an electrical short circuit and may lead to malfunction of the machine. Do not wash the inside of the
operator's cab with water. When washing the machine, be careful not to let water get into the electrical
components.
Service relating to the electric system is checking fan belt tension, checking damage or wear to the fan belt and
checking battery fluid level.
Never install any electric components other than those specified by Komatsu.
External electro-magnetic interference may cause malfunction of the control system controller, before installing
a radio receiver or other wireless equipment, contact your Komatsu distributor.
When working at the seashore, carefully clean the electric system to prevent corrosion.
When installing an operator's cab cooler or any other electrical equipment, connect it to an independent power
source connector. The cables to supply power to the optional equipment must never be connected to the fuse,
starting switch, or battery relay.

4-7
.

WEAR PARTS MAINTENANCE

WEAR PARTS
Wear parts such as the filter element, air cleaner element, etc. are to be replaced at the time of periodic maintenance
or before their abrasion limits.
The wear parts should be changed correctly in order to use the machine economically.
For part change, Komatsu genuine parts of excellent quality should be used.
When ordering parts, please check the part number in the parts book.

WEAR PARTS LIST


The parts in parentheses are to be replaced at the same time.

Item Part No. Part name Q'ty Replacement frequency


Engine oil filter 600-211-1231 Cartridge 4 EVERY 500 HOURS
Bypass filter 600-212-1511 Cartridge 2 EVERY 500 HOURS
Fuel filter 600-311-7111 Cartridge 2 EVERY 500 HOURS
424-16-11140 Element 4
(424-16-11130) (O-ring) (4)
Transmission oil filter EVERY 500 HOURS
(424-16-11630) (O-ring) (8)
(07002-01223) (O-ring) (4)
Hydraulic filter
07063-01210 Element 3
( Steering, hoist oil) EVERY 1000 HOURS
(07000-25175) (O-ring) (3)
( Rear brake cooling oil)
Corrosion resistor 600-411-1171 Cartridge 2 EVERY 1000 HOURS
561-02-62520 Inner element Ass'y 3
Air cleaner –
561-02-62530 Outer element Ass'y 3
Payload meter paper
7818-27-2910 Paper 1 –
(if equipped)
Payload meter inner battery
7818-27-2860 Battery 1 –
(if equipped)

4-8
.

MAINTENANCE RECOMMENDED FUEL, COOLANT, AND LUBRICANT

RECOMMENDED FUEL, COOLANT, AND LUBRICANT


Komatsu genuine oils are adjusted to maintain the reliability and durability of Komatsu construction equipment
and components.
In order to keep your machine in the best conditioner for long periods of time, it is essential to follow the
instructions in this Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Failure to follow these recommendations may result in shortened life or excess wear of the engine, power train,
cooling system, and/or other components.
Commercially available lubricant additives may be good for the machine, but they may also cause harm.
Komatsu does not recommend any commercially available lubricant additive.
Use the oil recommended according to the ambient temperature in the chart below.
Specified capacity means the total amount of oil including the oil in the tank and the piping. Refill capacity means
the amount of oil needed to refill the system during inspection and maintenance.
When starting the engine in temperatures below 0°C (32°F), be sure to use the recommended multi-grade oil,
even if the ambient temperature may become higher during the course of the day.
If the machine is operated at a temperature below -20°C (-4°F), a separate device is needed, so consult your
Komatsu distributor.
When the fuel sulfur content is less than 0.5%, change the engine oil according to the period inspection table
given in this Operation and Maintenance Manual.
If the fuel sulfur content is more than 0.5%, change the oil according to the following table.

Fuel sulfur content Engine oil change interval


0.5 to 1.0% 1/2 of regular interval
Above 1.0% 1/4 of regular interval

4-9
.

RECOMMENDED FUEL, COOLANT, AND LUBRICANT MAINTENANCE

USE OF FUEL, COOLANT AND LUBRICANTS ACCORDING TO AMBIENT TEMPERATURE

SAE: Society of Automotive Engineers


ASTM: American Society of Testing and Material
API: American Petroleum Institute

4 - 10
.

MAINTENANCE RECOMMENDED FUEL, COOLANT, AND LUBRICANT

Reservoir Rear brake Front


Engine oil Transmission Front brake Steering,
cooling oil suspension
pan case oil tank hoist oil tank
Capacity tank (each)
Spcified Liters 135 125 2 248 366 20
amount of oil US gal 35.64 33.0 0.53 65.47 96.62 5.28
Refill Liters 130 102 2 153 246 –
amount of oil US gal 34.32 26.93 0.53 40.39 64.94 –

Reservoir Rear
Differential Final drive Cooling
suspension Fuel tank
case case (each) system
Capacity (each)
Specified Liters 17.5 132 59 1250 228
amount of oil US gal 4.62 34.85 15.58 330 60.19
Refill Liters – 132 59 – –
amount of oil US gal – 34.85 15.58 – –

Note 1: SAE0W30EOS and SAE5W40EOS must be fully synthetic and HTHS ( High-Temperature High-Shear
Viscosity 150°C) must be equal to or higher than 3.5 cP. Komatsu EOS0W30 and EOS5W40 are the most
suitable oils. If these oils are not available, follow the instruction "RECOMMENDED BRANDS,
RECOMMENDED QUALITY FOR PRODUCTS OTHER THAN KOMATSU GENUINE OIL (PAGE 4-11)"
at the end of this chapter.

Note 2: Powertrain oil has different properties from engine oil. Be sure to use the recommended oils.

Note 3: Hyper grease (G2-T, G2-TE) has a high performance.


When it is necessary to improve the lubricating ability of the grease in order to prevent squeaking of pins and
bushings, the use of G2-T or G2-TE is recommended.

Note 4: Supercoolant (AF-NAC)


1) The coolant has the important function of preventing corrosion as well as preventing freezing.
Even in the areas where freezing is not an issue, the use of antifreeze coolant is essential.
Komatsu machines are supplied with Komatsu Supercoolant (AF-NAC). Komatsu Supercoolant (AF-NAC) has
excellent anticorrosion, antifreeze and cooling properties and can be used continuously for 2 years or 4000 hours.
Komatsu Supercoolant (AF-NAC) is strongly recommended wherever available.
2) For details of the ratio when diluting super coolant with water, see "CLEAN INSIDE OF COOLING SYSTEM
(PAGE 4-21)".
When the machine is shipped from the factory, it may be filled with coolant containing 30% or more Supercoolant
(AF-NAC). In this case, no adjustment is needed for temperatures down to -10°C (14°F). (never dilute with water)
3) To maintain the anticorrosion properties of Supercoolant (AF-NAC), always keep the density of Supercoolant
between 30% and 68%.

RECOMMENDED BRANDS, RECOMMENDED QUALITY FOR PRODUCTS OTHER THAN


KOMATSU GENUINE OIL
When using commercially available oils other than Komatsu genuine oil, or when checking the latest specifications,
refer to the Komatsu web page or consult your Komatsu distributor.

4 - 11
.

STANDARD TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR BOLTS AND NUTS MAINTENANCE

STANDARD TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR BOLTS AND NUTS


TORQUE LIST
Unless otherwise specified, tighten the metric nuts and bolts to the torque shown in the table below.
The tightening torque is determined by the width across the flats (b) of the nut and bolt.
If it is necessary to replace any nut or bolt, always use a Komatsu genuine part of the same size as the part that was
replaced.

Thread Width
Tightening torque [N·m (kgf·m)]
diameter across
of bolt flats
Target value Permissible range
(mm) (a) (mm) (b)
6 10 13.2 (1.35) 11.8 - 14.7 (1.2 - 1.5)
8 13 31 (3.2) 27 - 34 (2.8 - 3.5)
10 17 66 (6.7) 59 - 74 (6.0 - 7.5)
12 19 113 (11.5) 98 - 123 (10.0 - 12.5)
14 22 177 (18.0) 157 - 196 (16.0 - 20.0)
16 24 279 (28.5) 245 - 309 (25.0 - 31.5)
18 27 382 (39.0) 343 - 425 (35.0 - 43.5)
20 30 549 (56.0) 490 - 608 (50.0 - 62.0)
22 32 745 (76.0) 662 - 829 (67.5 - 84.5)
24 36 927 (94.5) 824 - 1030 (84.0 - 105.0)
27 41 1320 (135.0) 1180 - 1470 (120.0 - 150.0)
30 46 1720 (175.0) 1520 - 1910 (155.0 - 195.0)
33 50 2210 (225.0) 1960 - 2450 (200.0 - 250.0)
36 55 2750 (280.0) 2450 - 3040 (250.0 - 310.0)
39 60 3280 (335.0) 2890 - 3630 (295.0 - 370.0)

NOTICE
When tightening panels or other parts having tightening fixtures made of plastic, be careful not to use excessive torque: doing
so will damage the plastic parts. Pay enough attention when you tighten up.

Apply the following table for Hydraulic Hose.

Thread Width Tightening torque


diameter across
Target value Permissible range
flats
a (mm) b (mm) N·m kgf·m lbft N·m kgf·m lbft
10 14 14.7 1.5 10.8 12.7 - 16.7 1.3 - 1.7 9.4 - 12.3

14 19 29.4 3.0 21.7 27.5 - 39.2 2.8 - 4.0 20.3 - 28.9

18 24 78.5 8.0 57.9 58.8 - 98.1 6.0 - 10.0 43.4 - 72.3

22 27 117.7 12.0 86.6 88.3 - 137.3 9.0 - 14.0 65.1 - 101.3

24 32 147.1 15.0 108.5 117.7 - 176.5 12.0 - 18.0 86.8 - 130.2

30 36 215.7 22.0 159.1 176.5 - 245.2 18.0 - 25.0 130.2 - 180.8


33 41 255.0 26.0 188.1 215.7 - 284.4 22.0 - 29.0 159.1 - 209.8

4 - 12
.

MAINTENANCE PERIODIC REPLACEMENT OF SAFETY CRITICAL PARTS

PERIODIC REPLACEMENT OF SAFETY CRITICAL PARTS


To ensure safety at all times when operating or driving the machine, the user of the machine must always carry out
periodic maintenance. In addition, to further improve safety, the parts in the safety-critical parts list on the next page
must also be replaced at the specified interval. These parts are particularly closely connected to safety and fire
prevention, so please contact your Komatsu distributor to have them replaced.
Material quality of these parts can change as time passes and they are likely to wear out or deteriorate. However,
it is difficult to determine the extent of wear or deterioration at the time of periodic maintenance. Hence, it is required
to replace them with new ones regardless of their condition after a certain period of usage. This is important to
ensure that these parts maintain their full performance at all times.
Furthermore, should anything abnormal be found on any of these parts, replace it with a new one even if the periodic
replacement time for the part has not yet arrived.
If any of the hose clamps show deterioration like deformation or cracking, replace the clamps at the same time as
the hoses.
Also perform the following checks with hydraulic hoses which need to be replaced periodically. Tighten all loose
clamps and replace defective hoses, as required.
When replacing hoses, always replace O-rings, gaskets, and other such parts at the same time.

4 - 13
.

PERIODIC REPLACEMENT OF SAFETY CRITICAL PARTS MAINTENANCE

SAFETY CRITICAL PARTS

NO. Safety parts for periodic replacement Replacement interval Remarks


1 Fuel hose (Fuel tank - hand priming pump)
2 Fuel hose (Hand priming pump - injection pump)
3 Fuel hose (Injection pump - adapter)
4 Fuel hose (Adapter - fuel filter)
5 Fuel hose (Fuel filter - adapter)
6 Fuel hose (Adapter - emergency stop valve)
7 Fuel hose (Emergency stop valve - injection pump)
8 Fuel hose (Emergency stop valve - overflow valve)
9 Fuel hose (Over flow valve - fuel tank) Every 4000 hours or
every two years,
10 Fuel spill hose (between nozzles)
whichever comes first
11 Turbocharger lubrication hose
12 Rubber hoses of brake piping
High-pressure hoses in steering circuit
13 (pump ←→ demand valve ←→ steering valve ←→
Replace as
steering cylinder)
assembly
High-pressure hose in hoist circuit
14 (pump ←→ demand valve ←→ hoist valve ←→
hoist cylinder)
15 Outlet hose of retarder cooling oil pump
16 Outlet hose of transmission oil pump
17 Brake valve parts
18 Parking brake valve parts
19 Relay valve parts
20 Air governor parts
21 Retarder control valve parts Every 2000 hours or
Replace as
every one year,
22 Emergency relay valve parts a service kit
whichever comes first
23 Emergency brake valve parts
24 Quick release parts
25 Parking brake chamber parts
26 Brake chamber parts (Front and rear)
27 Seat belt Every 3 years Replace

4 - 14
.

MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE CHART

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE CHART


MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE CHART

INITIAL 250 HOURS SERVICE (ONLY AFTER THE FIRST 250 HOURS)
Change oil in engine oil pan, replace engine oil filter cartridge 4- 53
Replace fuel filter cartridge 4- 55
Replace transmission oil filter element 4- 56
Change oil in transmission case 4- 59
Replace steering, hoist oil tank and rear brake cooling oil tank filter element 4- 60
Change oil in steering, hoist oil tank 4- 63
Change oil in rear brake cooling oil tank 4- 64
Change oil in final drive case 4- 65
Change oil in differential case 4- 65
Check, adjust engine valve clearance 4- 66

WHEN REQUIRED
Check, clean and replace air cleaner 4- 19
Clean inside of cooling system 4- 21
Check level of window washer fluid, add fluid 4- 24
Clean air conditioner air filter 4- 24
Check refrigerant (gas) level 4- 25
Check dump body 4- 25
Check electric intake air heater 4- 25
Check length of suspension cylinder, check oil level 4- 26
Bleed air from rear brake 4- 28
Bleed air from front brake 4- 28
Adjust parking brake 4- 29
Adjust body positioner 4- 30
Replace fan belt, adjust auto tensioner 4- 32
Check play of output coupling of output shaft 4- 33
Selection and inspection of tires 4- 33

CHECK BEFORE STARTING

EVERY 100 HOURS SERVICE


Check alcohol level in alcohol injector, add alcohol 4- 37

4 - 15
.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE CHART MAINTENANCE

EVERY 250 HOURS SERVICE


Check oil level in differential case, add oil 4- 38
Check oil level in final drive case, add oil 4- 38
Lubricating 4- 39
Check level of battery electrolyte 4- 42
Check alternator belt, adjust 4- 45
Check tension of air conditioner compressor belt, adjust 4- 46
Clean breathers 4- 47
Check drive shaft 4- 48
Check frame 4- 48
Check braking capacity of foot brake 4- 49
Check braking capacity of retarder brake 4- 49
Check braking capacity of parking brake 4- 50
Check wear of parking brake pads 4- 50
Check, clean automatic suspension 4- 51
Inspection of engine emergency stop 4- 52

EVERY 500 HOURS SERVICE


Change oil in engine oil pan, replace engine oil filter cartridge 4- 53
Replace fuel filter cartridge 4- 55
Replace transmission filter elemen 4- 56
Check wear of front disc brake pad 4- 57
Clean, check radiator fins 4- 57
Check fan belt for wear and replace 4- 57

EVERY 1000 HOURS SERVICE


Replace corrosion resistor cartridge 4- 58
Change oil in transmission case, clean transmission case strainer 4- 59
Replace steering, hoist oil tank and rear brake cooling oil tank filter element 4- 60
Lubricating 4- 60
Check wear of rear brake discs 4- 62
Check tightening of turbocharger 4- 62

EVERY 2000 HOURS SERVICE


Change oil in steering, hoist oil tank 4- 63
Change oil in rear brake cooling oil tank 4- 64
Change oil in final drive case 4- 65
Change oil in differential case 4- 65
Clean differential case breather 4- 66
Clean emergency relay valve 4- 66
Check alternator, starting motor 4- 66
Check, adjust engine valve clearance 4- 66
Clean, check turbocharger 4- 66
Check play of turbocharger rotor 4- 66
Lubricate dump control linkage (5 points) 4- 67
Clean air dryer filter and deflector (if equipped) 4- 68
Replace plug with strainer from make-up tank of rear brake chamber 4- 68

4 - 16
.

MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE CHART

EVERY 4000 HOURS SERVICE


Check water pump 4- 69
Check air compressor 4- 69
Check fan pulley and tension pulley 4- 69
Check vibration damper 4- 69
Check injection pump rack rubber boot, replace 4- 69
Replace injection pump screen filter 4- 69
Clean injection pump oil inlet strainer 4- 70
Adjust front wheel bearing 4- 70
Adjust rear wheel bearing 4- 70

EVERY 15000 HOURS SERVICE


CHECK, REPLACE STEERING A ARM MOUNTING BOLT 4- 71

4 - 17
.

SERVICE PROCEDURE MAINTENANCE

SERVICE PROCEDURE
INITIAL 250 HOURS SERVICE (ONLY AFTER THE FIRST 250 HOURS)
Perform the following maintenance only after the first 250 hours.
Change oil in engine oil pan, replace engine oil filter cartridge
Replace fuel filter cartridge
Replace transmission oil filter element
Change oil in transmission case
Replace steering, hoist oil tank and rear brake cooling oil tank filter element
Change oil in steering and hoist oil tank
Change oil in rear brake cooling oil tank
Change oil in final drive case
Change oil in differential case
Check engine valve clearance, adjust
For details of the method of replacing or maintaining, see EVERY 500 HOURS, EVERY 1000 HOURS and EVERY
2000 HOURS SERVICE.

4 - 18
.

MAINTENANCE SERVICE PROCEDURE

WHEN REQUIRED

CHECK, CLEAN OR REPLACE AIR CLEANER


WARNING
If inspection, cleaning, or maintenance is carried out with the engine running, dirt will get into the engine and damage it.
Always stop the engine before carrying out these operations.
When using compressed air, there is danger that dirt may be blown around and cause serious injury.
Always use protective glasses, dust mask, and other protective equipment.

CHECKING
Clean the air clearner element if the dust indicator (1) shows red.

NOTICE
Do not clean the air cleaner element before red piston in dust indicator
appears.
If the element is cleaned frequently before the red piston appears, the air
cleaner will not be able to display its performance fully, and the cleaning
efficiency will also go down.
In addition, during the cleaning operation, more dirt stuck to the element
will fall inside the inner element.

CLEANING OR REPLACING OUTER ELEMENT


1. Remove the wing nut (2), then remove the outer element (3).

2. Clean the air cleaner body interior and the cover.

3. Direct dry compressed air (less than 0.69 MPa (7 kgf/ cm2, 99.4
PSI)) to the element from inside along its folds, then direct it
from outside along its folds and again from inside.
1) Remove one seal from the element whenever the element
has been cleaned.
2) Replace the outer element if it has been cleaned 6 times
repeatedly or used throughout a year. Replace the inner
element at the same time.
3) Replace both inner and outer elements when the dust
indicator red piston appears soon after installing the
cleaned outer element even though it has not been
cleaned 6 times.
4) Check inner element mounting nuts for looseness and, if necessary, retighten.

4 - 19
.

SERVICE PROCEDURE MAINTENANCE

4. If small holes or thinner parts are found on the element when


it is checked by shining a light through it after cleaning, replace
the element.

NOTICE
When cleaning the element, do not hit or beat it against anything.
Do not use an element whose folds, gasket or seal are damaged.

5. Remove the cloth or tape cover fitted in Step 1.


6. Set the cleaned element in position, and secure it with the wing
nut (2).
7. If any seal washer (4) or wing nut (2) is damaged, replace it with
a new part.
8. Remove vacuator valve (5) and clean with compressed air.
After cleaning, install again.

REPLACING INNER ELEMENT


1. First remove the cover and the outer element, and then remove the inner element.
2. Cover the air connector side (outlet side) with a clean cloth or tape.
3. Clean the air cleaner body interior, then remove the cover installed in Step 2.
4. Fit a new inner element to the body and tighten it with nuts.
Do not clean and reinstall an inner element.
5. Install the outer element and fasten it with the wing nut.
6. Remove vacuator valve (5) and clean with compressed air.
After cleaning, install again.
7. After replacing the element, return the red piston in the dust indicator to its original position.

REMARK
For both of inner element and outer element, when the element is attached, nuts should be tighten up with the
shaking motion of element in the way that the sealing rubber of the tip of the element closely contact with the inside
of the body.

4 - 20
.

MAINTENANCE SERVICE PROCEDURE

CLEAN INSIDE OF COOLING SYSTEM


WARNING
Soon after the engine has been stopped, the coolant is hot and the pressure inside of the radiator is high. Removing the cap
and draining the water under this condition can cause bodily burn. Allow the engine to cool, then slowly turn the cap to release
the pressure..
Cleaning is performed while the engine is running. When standing up or leaving from operator's seat, set the shift lever at N
position and parking brake valve lever at PARKING position.
See "OPERATIONS, CHECKS BEFORE STARTING (PAGE 3-68)", "STARTING ENGINE (PAGE 3-70)" in the section of
"Operation" for starting engine.
There is the danger of contacting with fan when the undercover is removed. Never approach the engine when the engine is
running.

Clean the inside of the cooling system, change the coolant and replace the corrosion resistor according to the table
below.

Interval of cleaning inside of cooling system


Antifreeze coolant Replacing corrosion resistor
and changing antifreeze coolant

Komatsu supercoolant Every two years or every 4000 hours


(AF-NAC) whichever comes first Every 1000 hours
and when cleaning the inside
of the cooling system
Permanent type antifreeze Every year (autumn) or every 2000 hours and when changing coolant.
(All-season type, *) whichever comes first.

*: Permanent type antifreeze shall meet the requirements of ASTM D3306-03.

Stop the machine on level ground when cleaning or changing the coolant.
The coolant has the important function of preventing corrosion as well as preventing freezing.
Even in the areas where freezing is not an issue, the use of antifreeze coolant is essential.
Komatsu machines are supplied with Komatsu Supercoolant (AF-NAC). Komatsu Supercoolant (AF-NAC) has
excellent anticorrosion, antifreeze and cooling properties and can be used continuously for 2 years or 4000 hours.
Komatsu Supercoolant (AF-NAC) is strongly recommended wherever available.
To maintain the anticorrosion properties of Supercoolant (AF-NAC), always keep the density of Supercoolant
between 30% and 68%.

4 - 21
.

SERVICE PROCEDURE MAINTENANCE

When deciding the ratio of antifreeze to water, check the lowest temperature in the past, and decide from the mixing
table given below.
It is actually better to estimate and temperature about 10°C (18°F) lower when deciding the mixing ratio.
The mixing ratio depends on the ambient temperature, but it should always be a minimum of 30% by volume
(antifreeze/total amount of coolant x 100).
The freezing temperature of undiluted antifreeze is -15°C (5°F). Do not store undiluted antifreeze at a temperature
of below -15°C (5°F).

Mixing rate of water and antifreeze

Lowest ambient °C -10 -15 -20 -25 -30


temperature °F 14 5 -4 -13 -22
Amount of Liters 68.4 79.8 95.76 102.6 114
antifreeze US gal 18.06 21.07 25.07 27.09 30.10
Liters 159.6 148.2 132.24 125.4 114
Amount of water
US gal 42.13 39.12 35.12 33.10 30.09

WARNING
Antifreeze coolant is flammable, so keep it away from flame.
Antifreeze coolant is toxic. When removing the drain plug, be careful not to get water containing antifreeze coolant on you. If it
gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with large amount of fresh water and see a doctor at once.

Use antifreeze and appropriate water for diluting (for details, see "COOLANT AND WATER FOR DILUTION (PAGE
4-5)")
We recommend use of an antifreeze density gauge to control the mixing proportions.
Prepare a container whose capacity is larger than the specified coolant volume to catch drained coolant.
Prepare a hose to supply antifreeze coolant and water.
1. Stop the engine and close the valve (1) of corrosion resistor
cartridge.

2. Turn radiator cap (2) slowly to remove it.

4 - 22
.

MAINTENANCE SERVICE PROCEDURE

3. Prepare the container to catch the coolant mixed water. Open


drain valve (3) at the bottom of the radiator and drain the
coolant.
Drain the air compressor unit for the brake by opening the drain
plugs (4 places).
4. After draining the coolant, close drain valve (3) and fill with city
water.
5. When the radiator is full, start the engine, and run it at low idle.
Keep the engine running at low idle for 10 minutes until the
water temperature reaches more than 90°C (194°F).
6. After flushing, stop the engine, open drain valve (3), then close
it after all the water has drained out.
7. After draining the water, clean the cooling system with cleaning agent.
For the cleaning method, see the instructions for the cleaning agent.
8. After flushing, open drain valve (3), drain all the water out.
9. Close drain valve (3).
10. Replace the corrosion resistor, and open valve (1).
For replacing corrosion resistor, see "REPLACE CORROSION RESISTOR CARTRIDGE (PAGE 4-58)".
11. Add coolant mixed with antifreeze until it overflows from the water filler.
Decide the proportions of antifreeze and water according to the table for the mixing rate of water and antifreeze.
12. To remove the air contained in the coolant, run the engine at low idle for 5 minutes, then run for another 5
minutes at high idle. (When doing this, leave the coolant filler cap OFF.)
13. Stop the engine. About 3 minutes later, supply the coolant up to the coolant filler, then close radiator cap.
14. Drain the coolant inside reserve tank (4) and fill again with the
coolant to a point between the H and L lines.

4 - 23
.

SERVICE PROCEDURE MAINTENANCE

CHECK LEVEL OF WINDOW WASHER FLUID, ADD FLUID


Carry out this check if there is air in the window washer fluid.

Check the level of the fluid in window washer tank (1), and if it is
low, fill with automobile window washer fluid.
Be careful not to let dirt or dust get in when adding fluid.

When operating at below freezing point, use fluid with antifreeze.

CLEAN AIR CONDITIONER AIR FILTER


If the air filter at the suction port of the air conditioner unit or the air
filter at the fresh air intake port become clogged, the cooling or
heating capacity will drop, so clean the filters once a week.

1. Remove cover (1) at the front of the cab.


2. Pull out the air filter and clean it by blowing it with compressed
air.

3. Release the catch of cover (2) on the right side of the


accelerator pedal to open it.
4. Pull out the air filter (recirculated air filter) in the air conditioner
unit suction port at the end of the duct, and blow off the dust
with a weak flow of compressed air or with a soft brush.

4 - 24
.

MAINTENANCE SERVICE PROCEDURE

CHECK REFRIGERANT (GAS) LEVEL


WARNING
If the refrigerant used in the air conditioner gets into your eyes or on your hands, it may cause loss of sight or frostbite. Do not
touch the refrigerant. Never loosen any part of the refrigerant circuit.
Do not bring any flame close to any point where the refrigerant gas is leaking.

If the cooling effect is poor, the level of the refrigerant (gas) is


probably low.
Check the sight glass of the receiver dryer on the inside left of the
radiator guard.

REMARK
Run the engine at idle, and if bubbles appear in the sight glass
when the air conditioner is set to cooling, the refrigerant level is low,
so please contact your Komatsu distributor to have it refilled.

CHECK DUMP BODY


Check that there are no cracks in the dump body.
1. Clean the dump body to make it easier to check.
2. Check all parts of the dump body for damage.
If any cracks or abnormal wear are found, carry out repairs.
Contact your Komatsu distributor for details of the repair procedure.

CHECK ELECTRIC INTAKE AIR HEATER


Before the start of the cold season (once a year), contact your Komatsu distributor to have the electrical intake air
heater checked for dirt or disconnections.

4 - 25
.

SERVICE PROCEDURE MAINTENANCE

CHECK LENGTH OF SUSPENSION CYLINDER, CHECK OIL LEVEL


When traveling, if the unevenness of the road surface is transmitted directly to the chassis (the machine bounces
or the cylinders retract and hit the stopper), carry out the following checks.

CHECK LENGTH OF CYLINDER


Front
Check that the bottom of the suspension cylinder cover is within
range (A) shown by the arrow on the label when the machine is
unloaded and on flat ground.

At the same time, when the machine is not loaded, remove cover (1), then measure dimension (B) from the shoulder
of the rod head of the suspension cylinder to the top surface of the flange.

Standard Buffering
specification specification
252 - 272 mm 236 - 256 mm
(B)
(9.9 - 10.7 in) (9.3 - 10.1 in)
Reference 474 - 494 mm 474 - 494 mm
(C) (18.7 - 19.5 in) (18.7 - 19.5 in)
Flange thickness
49 mm (1.9 in) 65 mm (2.6 in)
(D)

After checking, contact your Komatsu distributor for repairs if any problem is found.

4 - 26
.

MAINTENANCE SERVICE PROCEDURE

Rear

Measure dimension (E) from the shoulder of the rod head of the suspension cylinder to the top surface of the flange.

Standard Buffering
specification specification
230 - 250 mm 210 - 230 mm
(E)
(9.1 - 9.9 in) (8.3 - 9.1 in)
Flange thickness
50 mm (2.0 in) 70 mm (2.8 in)
(F)

After checking, contact your Komatsu distributor for repairs if any problem is found.

4 - 27
.

SERVICE PROCEDURE MAINTENANCE

BLEED AIR FROM REAR BRAKE


WARNING
Stop the machine on level ground and put blocks under the wheels before bleeding the air.

To make it easier to bleed the air, warm the oil up to a temperature


of at least 40°C (104°F) before bleeding the air.
1. Pull the retarder brake lever, loosen air bleed plug (1) to bleed
the air from the circuit, then tighten plug (1) and release the
retarder brake lever.
2. Repeat this procedure until no more bubbles come out from air
bleed plug (1). After completely bleeding the air, tighten plug
(1) securely.

BLEED AIR FROM FRONT BRAKE


WARNING
Stop the machine on level ground and put blocks under the wheels before
bleeding the air.

1. Start the engine and raise the pressure to the maximum


position in the green range on the air pressure gauge.
2. Fill oil reservoir (1) with oil.

3. Remove the cap of bleeder screw (2), insert a vinyl hose


(inside diameter: 8 mm (0.315in)), then loosen the bleeder
screw approx. 3/4 turns and depress the brake pedal slowly.
After tightening the bleeder screw, release the brake pedal.
Repeat this procedure until no more bubbles come out from the
vinyl hose.

Do not keep the brake pedal depressed continuously. Depress


it each time slowly to bleed the air.
After bleeding the air, tighten bleeder screw (2) securely and fit
the cap.
4. After completion of the air bleeding procedure, fill the oil reservoir to the specified level (MAX).

Repeat the same procedure on the left and right sides.


When bleeding the air from the front brakes and rear brakes at the same time, bleed the air from the rear brakes first.

4 - 28
.

MAINTENANCE SERVICE PROCEDURE

ADJUST PARKING BRAKE


WARNING
When carrying out the adjustment, raise the air pressure high enough to prevent the parking brake from being applied
automatically, and hang a warning sign on the parking brake valve lever to prevent any other person from operating it.
Never put any oil or grease on the surface of the pad or disc.

If the parking brake effect is poor, adjust as follows.


1. Check that the air pressure gauge is in the green range, then
release the parking brake.
2. Turn bolts (1) (2 places) clockwise to bring the pad into tight
contact with the disc.
3. Turn bolt (1) back 2/3 turns (4 clicks) in the counterclockwise
direction.

Measure the thickness of the pad, and if it is less than 1.5 mm (0.06
in), contact your Komatsu distributor to have it replaced.

When making the first adjustment after replacing the pad, turn bolt
(1) turn (6 clicks) in the counterclockwise direction.

After adjusting, check the braking capacity of the parking brake.


See "CHECK BRAKING CAPACITY OF PARKING BRAKE
(PAGE 4-50)". If the machine moves, contact your Komatsu
distributor for inspection.

4 - 29
.

SERVICE PROCEDURE MAINTENANCE

ADJUST BODY POSITIONER


WARNING
If for any reason the maintenance is performed while the engine is running,
strictly follow the next rules.
One should sit on the operator's seat, preparing to stop the engine at
any moment, and contact with the other.
Set the dump lever at HOLD position to prevent the dump body from
moving. Also, set the parking brake valve lever at PARKING position to
prevent the machine from moving.
When working near fan or belts, do not bring your body or any materials
closer that can be dragged into.
Do not touch the operation lever. If for any reason you have to move the
lever, be sure to contact with the other person to let him/her move to the
safe area.
If the materials or tools are dropped onto fan or belts, they fly away or
cut. Never drop or insert materials or tools.

With the positioner device, it is possible to automatically stop the


dump body when it rises to the desired position (to the dump body
elevation). Adjust if it does not automatically stop or if the shock
still remains.

ADJUSTING
1. Set the dump lever to the HOLD position.

2. Adjust push cable (1) to the standard length.


Standard length A: 180 mm (7.1 in)

3. Raise the dump body until the hoist cylinder is 50 mm (2.0 in) before the end of its stroke, then stop the engine.

4 - 30
.

MAINTENANCE SERVICE PROCEDURE

4. Loosen locknut (3), put plate (4) into contact with bracket (2),
then tighten locknut (3).
Reference dimension B: 147 mm (5.8 in)

5. After adjusting, start the engine, operate the dump lever, and check that the lever is automatically returned to
the HOLD position when the dump body rise to a point 50 mm (2.0 in) before the end of the hoist cylinder stroke.

REMARK
Check the operation of the body positioner before starting operations each day.

4 - 31
.

SERVICE PROCEDURE MAINTENANCE

REPLACE FAN BELT, ADJUST AUTO TENSIONER


Replace the belt if the V-belt contacts the bottom of the pulley groove, or if the fan belt is lower than the outside edge
of the pulley, or if there are any cracks, peeling, or other damage to the V-belt.

REPLACEMENT
1. Loosen lock nut (2), then loosen adjustment bolt (1). After that,
remove yoke (3) with locknut (2) still installed.
There is danger of losing parts, so do not remove bolt (1) from
bracket (4).

2. Insert a bar of a length of approx. 50 cm (20 in) into hole (7)


(diameter: 24) of the tension pulley bracket, and pull forward
strongly.
3. The spring is extended and the tension pulley (5) moves
inwards, so remove the old belt and replace it with a new one.
Always replace the V-belt as a set (5 belts).

4 - 32
.

MAINTENANCE SERVICE PROCEDURE

ADJUSTMENT
1. Install adjustment bolt (1) and locknut (2) to yoke (3).
2. Tighten adjustment bolt (1) until the clearance is 0 mm (0 in)
between the both ends of the oblong hole of yoke (3) and pin
(6) of tension pulley (5), then tighten a further 3 turns.
Tighten locknut (2) to hold in position.
3. Run for one hour, then check the clearance between the end
of the oblong hole of yoke (3) and pin (6) of tension pulley (5).
If there is any clearance, repeat Step 2 to adjust again.
If the fan belt makes any abnormal noise, adjust in the same
way.

CHECK PLAY OF OUTPUT COUPLING OF OUTPUT SHAFT


If any abnormal noise occurs around the output shaft or front drive
shaft, the rubber inside the output shaft may be deteriorated or
damaged, so check the play of the coupling as follows.

Play in circumferential direction


Using a bar, move the coupling in the direction of the
circumference and check the play in the circumferential direction at
the outside diameter of the coupling.
Standard: Max. 15 mm (0.6 in)

REMARK
If the play range is exceeded, the engine fan will start to rotate, so
when inspecting the play, check first that the engine fan is not
rotating.

If the result of the measurement shows that it is greater than the


standard value, please contact your Komatsu distributor for
disassembly and inspection.

4 - 33
.

SERVICE PROCEDURE MAINTENANCE

SELECTION AND INSPECTION OF TIRES


WARNING
If a tire or a rim is handled improperly, the tire may burst or may be
damaged and the rim may be broken and scattered, and that can cause
serious injury or death.
Since maintenance, disassembly, repair and assembly of the tires and
rims require special equipment and skill, be sure to ask a tire repair
shop to do the work.
Do not heat or weld the rim to which the tire is installed. Do not make a
fire near the tire.

SELECTION OF TIRES

WARNING
Select the tires according to the conditions of use and the weight of the attachments on the machine. Use only specified tires and
inflate them to the specified pressure.

Select the tires according to the conditions of use and the weight of the attachments of the machine. Use the
following table.
Since the travel speed indicated on the speedometer varies with the tire size, consult your Komatsu distributor when
using optional tires.

Specification of tire [kg (lb)] Size Remarks


Front 27250 (60086) 27.00R49!!
wheel 25000 (55125) 27.00-49-48PR Type 1 for
construction
Rear 27250 (60086) 27.00R49!! equipment
wheel 25000 (55125) 27.00-49-48PR

4 - 34
.

MAINTENANCE SERVICE PROCEDURE

CHECK OF INFLATION PRESSURE OF TIRES AND INFLATION OF THEM

WARNING
When inflating a tire, check that any person will not enter the working
area and use an air chuck which has a clip and which can be fixed to the
air valve.
While inflating the tire, check the inflation pressure occasionally so that
it will not rise too high.
If the rim is not fitted normally, it may be broken and scattered while the
tire is inflated. Accordingly, place a guard around the tire and do not
work in front of the rim but work on the tread side of the tire.
Abnormal drop of inflation pressure and abnormal fitting of the rim
indicate a trouble in the tire or rim. In this case, be sure to ask a tire
repair shop for repair.
Be sure to observe the specified inflation pressure.
Do not adjust the inflation pressure of the tires just after high-speed
travel or heavy-load work.

Check
Measure the inflation pressure with a tire pressure gauge, while the tires are cool, before starting work.

Inflation of tires
Adjust the inflation pressure properly.
When inflating a tire, use an air chuck which can be fixed to the air valve of the tire as shown in the figure. Do not
work in front of the rim but work on the tread side of the tire.
The proper inflation pressure is shown below.

Tire size Inflation pressure


27.00R49!! (standard) 0.69 MPa (7.00 kgf/cm2, 99.4 PSI)
27.00-49-48PR (if equipped) 0.55 MPa (5.60 kgf/cm2, 79.52 PSI)

NOTICE
If the tires are used when the inflation pressure is less than the value given in the table above, the rim may be damaged.
Always keep the tire inflation pressure within +0 to +0.03 MPa (0.3 kgf/cm2, 4.3 PSI) of the value in the table above.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN REPLACING TIRE


If the hub nuts have been tightened again after replacing the tire,
travel for 5 to 6 km, then tighten again to settle all the contacting
parts.
In particular, there are more contacting parts on the rear wheels
than on the front wheels, so it will take time for the parts to settle.
For this reason, repeat the tightening process for the first 50 hours
after installation. However, on the rear wheels, there are hub nuts
at 3 places on the inside, but these are for temporary assembly, so
there is no need to tighten the inside hub nuts after the outside hub
nuts are tightened.

4 - 35
.

SERVICE PROCEDURE MAINTENANCE

CHECK BEFORE STARTING


For the following items, see "CHECK BEFORE STARTING (PAGE 3-56)".
Check coolant level, add coolant
Check oil level in front brake oil tank, add oil
Check dust indicator
Drain water from air tank
Check oil level in engine oil pan, add oil
Check oil level in transmission case, add oil
Check oil level in steering and hoist oil tank, add oil
Check oil level in rear brake cooling oil tank, add oil
Drain water, sediment from fuel tank
Check fuel level, add fuel
Check wheel hub nuts, tighten
Check central warning lamp
Check braking effect
Check machine monitor system
Check braking capacity of emergency brake
Check manual emergency steering
Check auto-emergency steering
Check backup alarm
Check electric wiring
Check inflation pressure of tires

4 - 36
.

MAINTENANCE SERVICE PROCEDURE

EVERY 100 HOURS SERVICE

CHECK ALCOHOL LEVEL IN ALCOHOL INJECTOR, ADD ALCOHOL


(Machines equipped with alcohol injector)

During the cold season, check the ethyl alcohol level every 100
hours on the service meter.
When removing filler cap (1) of the alcohol injector to carry out the
inspection, loosen it slowly to release the remaining pressure
before removing it.
If the alcohol level is low, add alcohol to the bottom surface of the
threaded portion of the filler cap.

REMARK
On this machine, air is used to operate the brakes. When the machine is operated in cold weather, the moisture
in the air will freeze and cause problems such as defective operation of the valve, so add ethyl alcohol to the air
system to lower the freezing point.
When filling the alcohol injector with alcohol before the cold season, release the remaining pressure, remove the
cap, then add 1.4 liters (0.37 US gal) of ethyl alcohol through the filler port.
After the cold season, loosen drain valve (2) and drain the ethyl alcohol.

4 - 37
.

SERVICE PROCEDURE MAINTENANCE

EVERY 250 HOURS SERVICE


Maintenance for every 100 hours should be carried out at the same time.

CHECK OIL LEVEL IN DIFFERENTIAL CASE, ADD OIL


WARNING
The parts and oil are at high temperature immediately after the engine is stopped, and may cause serious burns. Wait for the
temperature to go down before starting the operation.
When removing plug, oil may spout out. So turn the plug gradually to release the internal pressure, then carefully remove it.

1. Remove plug (G) and check that the oil level is near the bottom
of the plug hole.
2. If the oil level is too low, add oil through the plug hole until the
oil overflows.

CHECK OIL LEVEL IN FINAL DRIVE CASE, ADD OIL


WARNING
The parts and oil are at high temperature immediately after the engine is stopped, and may cause serious burns. Wait for the
temperature to go down before starting the operation.
If there is still pressure remaining inside the case, the oil or plug may fly out.
Loosen the plug slowly to release the pressure.

1. Stop the machine so that casting line (1) is horizontal and drain
plug (P) is immediately at the bottom.
2. Remove plug (G) and check that the oil level is near the bottom
of the plug hole.
3. If the oil level is too low, add oil through the plug hole until the
oil overflows.

4 - 38
.

MAINTENANCE SERVICE PROCEDURE

LUBRICATION
1. Stop the engine.
2. Using a grease pump, pump in grease through the grease fittings marked by the arrows.
3. After greasing, wipe off any old grease that was pushed out.

Carry out the greasing operation every day when operating in


places where the grease flows out easily, such as when traveling
through mud or water.

(1) Dump body hinge pin (left and right: 1 place each)
(2) Rear suspension (left and right: 2 places each)

(3) Differential support (left and right: 4 places each)

(4) Hoist cylinder pin (left and right: 2 places each)

4 - 39
.

SERVICE PROCEDURE MAINTENANCE

(5) Front suspension (left and right: 1 place each)

(6) Steering cylinder pin (4 places)


(7) Steering link pin (5 places)

4 - 40
.

MAINTENANCE SERVICE PROCEDURE

(8) Steering linkage (left and right: 3 places each)

(9) Drive shaft (5 places)

4 - 41
.

SERVICE PROCEDURE MAINTENANCE

CHECK LEVEL OF BATTERY ELECTROLYTE


Perform this check before operating the machine.

WARNING
Do not use the battery if the battery electrolyte level is below the LOWER LEVEL line. This will accelerate deterioration of the
inside of the battery and reduce the service life of the battery. In addition, it may cause an explosion.
The battery generates flammable gas and there is danger of explosion, do not bring fire or sparks near the battery.
Battery electrolyte is dangerous. If it gets in your eyes or on your skin, wash it off with a large amount of water and consult a
doctor.
When adding distilled water to the battery, do not allow the battery electrolyte to go above the UPPER LEVEL line. If the
electrolyte level is too high, it may leak and cause damage to the paint surface or corrode other parts.

NOTICE
When adding distilled water in cold weather, add it before starting operations in the morning to prevent the electrolyte from
freezing.

Inspect the battery electrolyte level at least once a month and follow the basic safety procedures given below.

WHEN CHECKING ELECTROLYTE LEVEL FROM SIDE OF BATTERY


If it is possible to check the electrolyte level from the side of the battery, check as follows.
1. Remove hook (1), then open inspection cover (2).

2. Use a wet cloth to clean the area around the electrolyte level
lines and check that the electrolyte level is between the
UPPER LEVEL (U.L.) and LOWER LEVEL (L.L.) lines.
If the battery is wiped with a dry cloth, static electricity may
cause a fire or explosion.

4 - 42
.

MAINTENANCE SERVICE PROCEDURE

3. If the battery electrolyte level is below the mid point between


the UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL, immediately remove
cap (3) and add distilled water (or commercially available
battery filler solution) to the UPPER LEVEL.
4. After adding distilled water, tighten cap (3) securely.

REMARK
If distilled water is added to above the U.L. line, use a syringe to
lower the level to the U.L. line. Neutralize the removed fluid with
baking soda (sodium bicarbonate), then flush it away with a large
amount of water or consult your Komatsu distributor or battery
maker.

WHEN IT IS IMPOSSIBLE TO CHECK ELECTROLYTE LEVEL FROM SIDE OF BATTERY


If it is impossible to check the electrolyte level from the side of the battery, or there is no display of the UPPER
LEVEL line on the side of the battery, check as follows.
1. Remove hook (1), then open inspection cover (2).

2. Remove cap (3) at the top of the battery and look through the
filler port to check the electrolyte level. If the electrolyte is not
up to the sleeve, immediately add distilled water (or
commercially available battery filler solution) to the bottom of
the sleeve (UPPER LEVEL).

4 - 43
.

SERVICE PROCEDURE MAINTENANCE

Use the diagram below for reference, and check if the electrolyte reaches the bottom of the sleeve.

3. After adding distilled water, tighten cap (3) securely.

REMARK
If distilled water is added to above the bottom of the sleeve, use a syringe to lower the level to the bottom of the
sleeve. Neutralize the removed fluid with baking soda (sodium bicarbonate), then flush it away with a large amount
of water or consult your Komatsu distributor or battery maker.

WHEN IT IS POSSIBLE TO USE INDICATOR TO CHECK ELECTROLYTE LEVEL


If it is possible to use an indicator to check the electrolyte level, follow the instructions given.

4 - 44
.

MAINTENANCE SERVICE PROCEDURE

CHECK ALTERNATOR BELT, ADJUST

CHECKING
The belt should normally deflect by above 15 mm (0.6 in) when
pressed with the thumb (with a force of approx. 58.8 N (6 kgf) at a
point midway between the drive pulley and alternator pulley.

ADJUSTING
1. Loosen bolt (1) and lock nut (2).
2. Rotate adjusting nut (3) so that the deflection is approx. 15 mm
(0.6 in) (at a force of approx. 58.8 N (6 kgf).)
3. After adjustment, tighten lock nut (2) and bolt (1) securely.

REMARK
Check each pulley for breakage and wear of the V-groove. In
particular, check that the V-belt does not touch the bottom of the
V-groove.
If any abnormality is found, ask your Komatsu distributor for
replacement of the pulley.
If the V-belt is so lengthened that it cannot be adjusted any more
or if it has any cuts or cracks, replace it.
When adjusting the V-belt, do not press the alternator directly
with a bar, but put a wood piece, etc. in-between them.
If the V-belt has been replaced with a new part, there will be
initial elongation, so inspect and adjust it again after one-hour of
operation.

4 - 45
.

SERVICE PROCEDURE MAINTENANCE

CHECK AIR CONDITIONER COMPRESSOR BELT TENSION, ADJUST

CHECKING
The belt should normally deflect by 10 mm (0.4 in) when pressed
with the thumb (with a force of approx. 58.8 N (6 kgf)) at a point
midway between the air compressor pulley and drive pulley.

ADJUSTING
1. Loosen bolt (1) and lock nut (3).
2. Rotate adjusting nut (2) so that the deflection is approx. 10 mm
(0.4 in) (at a force of approx. 58.8 N (6 kgf)).
3. After adjustment, tighten lock nut (3) and bolt (1) securely.
4. Check for damage to the pulleys, and wear of the V-groove and
V-belt. Be particularly careful to check that the V-belt is not in
contact with the bottom of the V-groove.
5. If the V-belt is so lengthened that it cannot be adjusted any
more or if it has any cuts or cracks, replace it.
6. If the V-belt has been replaced with a new part, there will be
initial elongation, so adjust the belt again after operating for 2
to 3 days.

4 - 46
.

MAINTENANCE SERVICE PROCEDURE

CLEAN BREATHERS
Remove the mud and dirt from around the breathers, then remove the breathers and wash out the dirt with clean
diesel oil or flushing oil.

Transmission case breather (2 places)


Transmission valve, bracket section of air conditioner
installment

Hydraulic tank

1. Remove nut (1), then remove cover (2) and wash element (3).
2. Install element (3), then install cover (2) and nut (1).

4 - 47
.

SERVICE PROCEDURE MAINTENANCE

CHECK DRIVE SHAFT


If there is any problem, such as looseness of the drive shaft
connection, play in the spline or bearing portion, or runout of the
shaft, please contact your Komatsu distributor for repair.

CHECK FRAME
WARNING
When the inspection is performed with the dump body raised, be sure to lock the dump lever at HOLD position, and use safety
pins.

1. Wash the frame to make it easier to check.


2. Check all parts of the frame for damage.
In particular, check the colored portions in the diagram and if
any cracks or damage are found, repair the damage. Please
contact your Komatsu distributor for details of the repair
procedure.

4 - 48
.

MAINTENANCE SERVICE PROCEDURE

CHECK BRAKING CAPACITY OF FOOT BRAKE


WARNING
If the machine moves, it will lead to serious injury or death. If machine begins to move during the inspection of braking capacity,
lower the engine speed immediately, set shifting lever at N position, and then set parking brake valve lever at PARKING position.

Check the braking capacity of the foot brake as follows.


1. Set the air pressure to the maximum with the machine on flat
ground, and depress foot brake (1).
2. Set shift lever (2) to the D position, gradually raise the engine
speed, and check that the machine does not move even when
the engine speed reaches 1750 rpm. If the machine does not
move, it is normal.
3. Lower the engine speed, set shift lever at N position, and then
set parking brake valve lever at PARKING position. If any
abonormality is found, ask your Komatsu distributor for repair.

CHECK BRAKING CAPACITY OF RETARDER BRAKE


WARNING
If the machine moves, it will lead to serious injury or death. If machine begins to move during the inspection of braking capacity,
lower the engine speed immediately, set gear shift lever at N position, and then depress the foot brake.

Check the braking capacity of the retarder brake as follows.


1. Set the air pressure to the maximum with the machine on flat
ground, and pull retarder lever (1) fully.
2. Set shift lever (2) to the D position, gradually raise the engine
speed, and check that the machine does not move even when
the engine speed reaches 1300 rpm. If the machine does not
move, it is normal.
3. Lower the engine speed, set gear shift lever at N position. If
any problem is found, ask your Komatsu distributor for repair.

4 - 49
.

SERVICE PROCEDURE MAINTENANCE

CHECK BRAKING CAPACITY OF PARKING BRAKE


WARNING
If the machine moves, it will lead to serious injury or death. If machine begins to move during the inspection of braking capacity,
lower the engine speed immediately, set gear shift lever at N position, and then depress the foot brake.

Check the braking capacity of the parking brake as follows.


1. Set the air pressure to the maximum with the machine on flat
ground, and set parking brake valve lever (1) to the PARKING
position.
2. Set gear shift lever (2) to the D position, gradually raise the
engine speed, and check that the machine does not move
even when the engine reaches full speed. If the machine does
not move, it is normal.
3. Lower the engine speed, set gear shift lever at N position. If
any problem is found, ask your Komatsu distributor for repair.

CHECK WEAR OF PARKING BRAKE PADS


WARNING
Never put any oil or grease on the surface of the pad or disc.

Measure the thickness of the pad, and if it is less than 1.5 mm (0.06
in), contact your Komatsu distributor.

4 - 50
.

MAINTENANCE SERVICE PROCEDURE

CHECK, CLEAN AUTOMATIC SUSPENSION


WARNING
If for any reason the maintenance is performed while the engine is running,
strictly follow the next rules.
One should sit on the operator's seat, preparing to stop the engine at
any moment, and contact with the other.
Set the dump lever at HOLD position to prevent the dump body from
moving. Also, set the parking brake valve lever at PARKING position to
prevent the machine from moving.
When working near fan or belts, do not bring your body or any materials
closer that can be dragged into.
Do not touch the operation lever. If for any reason you have to move the
lever, be sure to contact with the other person to let him/her move to the
safe area.
If the materials or tools are dropped onto fan or belts, they fly away or
cut. Never drop or insert materials or tools.

1. Remove the cover (1) used for inspection.

2. Check the positions of the link. Check that it moves to the


following positions:
For normal travel when empty: soft
When the brake is depressed: medium
When the dump lever is at any position other than FLOAT:
hard.

If any problem is found, please contact your Komatsu distributor for inspection and adjustment.

If operations are carried out on muddy or wet ground, mud will stick to the link, and the movement may become slow,
so check and clean.

4 - 51
.

SERVICE PROCEDURE MAINTENANCE

INSPECTION OF ENGINE EMERGENCY STOP


WARNING
Do not use this switch to stop the engine except in an emergency case.
Once it is used and the engine stops completely, return it to the ON (Start)
position.

1. Start the engine and run it at low idling speed.

2. Turn the engine emergency stop switch to the STOP position (Position to stop the engine), and confirm that the
engine stops.
The engine will stop 10 to 20 sec later. If it fails to stop, ask your Komatsu distributor for inspection and
adjustment.

4 - 52
.

MAINTENANCE SERVICE PROCEDURE

EVERY 500 HOURS SERVICE


Carry out maintenance for EVERY 100 HOURS and EVERY 250 HOURS SERVICE at the same time.

CHANGE OIL IN ENGINE OIL PAN, REPLACE ENGINE OIL FILTER CARTRIDGE
WARNING
The parts and oil is at high temperature after the engine has been operated, and it can result in a burn. Wait for the oil to cool down
before changing it.

Refill capacity: 130 liters (34.32 US gal)


Prepare a filter wrench

1. Set a container to catch the oil immediately under the drain valve under the chassis.
2. Remove drain plug (1), then loosen drain valve (2) slowly to
avoid getting oil on yourself, and drain the oil. Be careful not to
loosen the drain valve too far and deform the stopper pin inside
the valve.
When draining the oil, fit a standard hose to the drain valve to
prevent the oil from spraying out.
3. Check the drained oil, and if there are excessive metal
particles or foreign material, please contact your Komatsu
distributor.
4. Tighten drain valve (2) and drain plug (1).
Tightening torque
Drain plug (1), drain valve (2): 68.6 ± 9.8N·m
(7 ± 1 kgf·m, 50.6 ± 7.2 lbft)
5. Using the filter wrench, turn 4 full-flow filter cartridges (3) and
2 bypass filter cartridges (4) to the left to remove them.
When doing this, to prevent getting oil on yourself, do not carry
out this operation from immediately under the cartridge.
In particular, if this operation is carried out immediately after
stopping the engine, a large amount of oil will come out, so wait
for 10 minutes before starting the operation.
6. Clean the filter holder, fill the new filter cartridge with oil, then
coat the seal and thread of the filter cartridge with oil (or coat
thinly with grease) and install.
7. When installing the filter cartridge, tighten until the packing
face is in contact with the filter holder, then tighten a further 3/4
- 1 turn.

4 - 53
.

SERVICE PROCEDURE MAINTENANCE

8. Pour in the specified amount of engine oil from oil filler (F).
9. Run the engine for a short time at idling, then check if the oil is
at the specified level. For details, see CHECK OIL LEVEL IN
ENGINE OIL PAN, ADD OIL (PAGE 3-58).

4 - 54
.

MAINTENANCE SERVICE PROCEDURE

REPLACE FUEL FILTER CARTRIDGE


WARNING
Each part is at high temperature after the engine has been operated, so never change the filter immediately after finishing
operations. Wait for each part to cool down before changing it.
Do not bring fire or sparks near the fuel.

Prepare a filter wrench

1. Close supply valve (1) of the fuel tank.


2. Set the container to catch the fuel under the filter cartridge.
3. Using a filter wrench, turn filter cartridge (2) counterclockwise
to remove it.
4. Clean the filter holder, fill a new filter cartridge with clean fuel,
coat the packing surface with engine oil, then install it to the
filter holder.
5. When installing, tighten until the packing surface contacts the
seal surface of the filter holder, then tighten a further 1/2 to
3/4 turns.
If the filter cartridge is tightened too far, the packing will be
damaged and this will lead to leakage of fuel. If the filter is too
loose, fuel will also leak from the packing, so always tighten the
correct amount.
6. After replacing filter cartridge (2), loosen air bleed plug (3), and
open supply valve (1).
7. Loosen knob (4) (one each on left and right) of the feed pump,
and move it up and down to make the fuel overflow until no
more bubbles come out from air bleed plug (3).
8. Tighten air bleed plug (3), then push in knob (4) (one each on
left and right) of the feed pump, and tighten it.
9. After replacing the filter cartridge, start the engine and check
that there is no leakage of fuel from the filter seal surface. If
there is any leakage of fuel, check the tightening of the filter
cartridge. If there is still leakage of fuel, follow Step 2 and 3 to
remove the filter cartridge, then check the packing surface for
damage or foreign material. If any damage or foreign material
is found in the packing, replace the cartridge with a new part,
then repeat Steps 4 to 9 to install the filter cartridge.

When the engine is started after stopping because fuel is used up, if misfirming or black exhaust emission occur,
bleed air from the fuel line according to the following procedure.

10. Loosen the air bleed plugs of both injection pumps, bleed air by operating both feed pumps as explained in Steps
6 - 8 above.

Be sure to use both priming pumps to bleed air.


If any air remains in the fuel line, it can cause a problem in the fuel system.

4 - 55
.

SERVICE PROCEDURE MAINTENANCE

REPLACE TRANSMISSION OIL FILTER ELEMENT


WARNING
The parts and oil are at high temperature immediately after the engine is stopped, and may cause burns. Wait for the
temperature to go down before starting the work.
When removing the oil filler cap, turn it slowly to release the internal pressure, then remove it.

1. Set the container to catch the oil under the filter case.
2. Remove drain plug (1) at the bottom of the filter case, drain the
oil, then tighten the plug again.
3. Hold down case (2), loosen center bolt (3), then remove case
(2).
4. Remove the element and clean the inside of the case.
5. Replace the filter gasket and O-ring with new parts. Coat the
gasket and O-ring thinly with clean engine oil before installing.

6. Assemble the new element to the case, set the case in position, and install with center bolt (3).
Be careful not to tighten center bolt (3) too far.
Tightening torque: 152 ± 14.7 N·m (15.5 ± 1.5 kgf·m, 112.1 ± 10.8 lbft)
7. Run the engine for a short time at idling, then stop the engine, and check that the oil is up to the specified level.
For details, see "CHANGE OIL IN TRANSMISSION CASE, CLEAN TRANSMISSION CASE STRAINER
(PAGE 4-59)".

Run the engine at high idling, and when the oil is warmed up, if the transmission filter clogging monitor lamp flashes,
replace the element immediately.

4 - 56
.

MAINTENANCE SERVICE PROCEDURE

CHECK WEAR OF FRONT DISC BRAKE PADS


WARNING
If the pad is cotinued to use after the period of wear limit, not only the disk will be damaged but also the brake will loose its
effect, and it is dangerous. If the period of wear limit approaches, check frequently the condition to change the pad at proper
time.
Perform inspection every 250 hours if the work site is covered by lots of earth and sand and if it is at the location where the foot
brake is frequently used.

Measure the thickness of pad, and if the thickness is less, than 3


mm (0.12 in), please contact your Komatsu distributor for
replacement.

The pad wear is not necessarily the same for the left and right
wheels, so always check the pads on both the left and right. If any
of the pads has reached the wear limit, always replace all 4 pads.

If the work is performed on the muddy and watery ground, the mud
sticks to caliper or disc. Leaving the mud will increase the wear of
pad, so wash out thoroughly with water.

CLEAN, CHECK RADIATOR FINS


WARNING
If compressed air scattered around dust and debris, there is danger of injury. Always wear protective equipment such as
protective glasses and mask.

If the radiator fins become clogged or bent, this may cause overheating of the engine, so always clean or carry out
inspection and take the necessary actions.
Cleaning can be carried out by using jets of air, steam, or water,
but be careful not to let the nozzle contact the fin.
Air pressure : Max. 0.98 MPa (10 kgf/cm2, 142 PSI)
Steam pressure : Max. 0.39 MPa (4 kgf/cm2, 56.8 PSI)
When using compressed air or steam, keep the nozzle at 90
degrees to the radiator.
Examine the rubber hose, and if any cracks or brittle places are
found, replace the hose. In addition, check also for loose hose
clamps.

CHECK FAN BELT FOR WEAR AND REPLACE


Since inspection and replacement of the fan belt requires special tools, contact your Komatsu distributor.

The machine is equipped with an auto-tensioner, so there is no need to carry out any adjustment until the belt is
replaced.
For details of replacing the fan belt, see REPLACE FAN BELT, ADJUST AUTO TENSIONER (PAGE 4-32).

4 - 57
.

SERVICE PROCEDURE MAINTENANCE

EVERY 1000 HOURS SERVICE


Carry out the EVERY 100 HOURS MAINTENANCE, EVERY 250 HOURS MAINTENANCE, and EVERY 500
HOURS MAINTENANCE at the same time.

REPLACE CORROSION RESISTOR CARTRIDGE


WARNING
All the engine parts are at high temperature after the engine has been operated, so never replace the cartridge immediately after
finishing operations.
Wait for the oil to cool down before replacing the cartridge.

Prepare a filter wrench

1. Screw in valve (1) at the top of the corrosion resistor.


2. Set the container to catch the water under the cartridge.
3. Using a filter wrench, remove cartridge (2).
4. Clean the filter holder, coat the steel surface of the new filter
cartridge with clean engine oil, then install it.
5. When installing, tighten until the gasket contacts the seal
surface of the filter holder, then tighten a further 2/3 turns.
If the filter cartridge is tightened too far, the gasket will be
damaged and this will lead to leakage of water. If the filter is too
loose, water will also leak from the gap at the gasket, so always
tighten the correct amount.
6. Open valve (1).
7. After replacing the cartridge, start the engine and check that there is no leakage of water from the filter seal
surface. If there is any leakage of water, check the tightening of the filter cartridge.

4 - 58
.

MAINTENANCE SERVICE PROCEDURE

CHANGE OIL IN TRANSMISSION CASE, CLEAN TRANSMISSION CASE STRAINER


WARNING
The parts and oil are at high temperature immediately after the engine is stopped, and may cause burns. Wait for the
temperature to go down before starting the work.
When removing the oil filler cap, turn it slowly to release the internal pressure, then remove it.

Refill capacity: 102 liters (26.93 US gal)

1. Set the container to catch the oil directly under the drain plug.
Remove drain plug (1), then loosen drain valve (2) slowly to
avoid getting oil on yourself, and drain the oil, then tighten the
plug again.

2. Remove bolt (3), then remove the cover and take out strainer
(4).
3. Remove any dirt stuck to the strainer, then wash in clean diesel
fuel or flushing oil. If the strainer is damaged, replace it.

4. After installing the strainer, add oil through oil filler (F) to the
specified level.

5. After adding oil, check that the oil is at the specified level. See
"CHECK OIL LEVEL IN TRANSMISSION CASE, ADD OIL
(PAGE 3-59)".

4 - 59
.

SERVICE PROCEDURE MAINTENANCE

REPLACE STEERING, HOIST OIL TANK AND REAR BRAKE COOLING OIL TANK FILTER
ELEMENT
WARNING
The parts and oil are at high temperature immediately after the engine is stopped, and may cause burns. Wait for the
temperature to go down before starting the work.
When removing the oil filler cap, turn it slowly to release the internal pressure, then remove it.

1. Turn the cap of oil filler (F) slowly to release the internal
pressure, then remove the cap.
2. Remove bolt (1), then remove cover (2).
3. Take out the element, then wash the inside of the case and the
removed parts.
4. Install the new element, then install cover (2) with bolt (1).

If the filter element clogging caution lamp lights up when the


engine water temperature gauge is in the green range and the
engine is running at 1200 - 2100 rpm, replace the element
immediately.

LUBRICATION
1. Using a grease pump, pump in grease through grease fittings marked by arrows.
2. After greasing, wipe off any old grease that was pushed out.

(1) Fan pulley (1 place)


(2) Tension pulley (2 places)

4 - 60
.

MAINTENANCE SERVICE PROCEDURE

(3) Transmission mount (1 place)

(4) Automatic suspension link (left and right: 1 place each)

(5) Parking brake linkage (3 places/one caliper)

4 - 61
.

SERVICE PROCEDURE MAINTENANCE

CHECK WEAR OF REAR BRAKE DISC


WARNING
Carry out this check when the brake oil temperature is below 60°C (140°F).
When carrying out the work with two workers, if the retarder control lever is pulled suddenly, there is danger that the rod of the
disc wear measurement gauge may fly out suddenly under hydraulic pressure. Pull the rod out fully, and operate the retarder
control lever slowly over a period of approx. 10 seconds.
If the disc wear approaches the wear limit, check the condition frequently, regardless of the maintenance interval. In addition,
check the retarder capacity carefully.

1. Stop the machine on level ground, set the parking brake valve lever to the PARKING position, then check that
the other brakes are not applied before starting inspection.
2. Remove plug (1) from the rear brake and install the disc wear
measurement gauge.
When doing this, tighten the nipple fully and pull the rod of the
disc wear measurement gauge out fully. If it is not pulled out,
there is danger that the rod may fly out under hydraulic
pressure when the retarder lever is pulled.
Part number for gauge: 561-98-61122

3. Turn the starting switch to the ON position and check that the
air pressure gauge is in the green range.
4. If the air pressure is low, start the engine and run the engine at
2,000 rpm until the air pressure gauge enters the green range.
When it enters the green range, turn the starting switch OFF.
5. Operate the retarder control lever slowly over approx. 10 seconds to apply the brake.
In this condition, push the gauge rod in slowly until it contacts the piston.
6. If mark (A) of the disc wear measurement gauge goes in
beyond the end face of the case, this means that the disc has
reached the wear limit.
If this happens, please contact your Komatsu distributor for
inspection and maintenance.
If the rod is released suddenly after measurement, there is
great danger that the rod may fly out under hydraulic pressure.
Keep the rod held down and let it back slowly. When it reaches
the end of its stroke, release it.
7. Return the retarder control lever.
8. Remove the disc wear measurement gauge and install plug (1).
9. Bleed all the air from the circuit. For details, see "BLEED AIR FROM REAR BRAKE (PAGE 4-28)".

CHECK TIGHTENING PARTS OF TURBOCHARGER


Contact your Komatsu distributor to have the tightening portions checked.

4 - 62
.

MAINTENANCE SERVICE PROCEDURE

EVERY 2000 HOURS SERVICE


Carry out the periodic maintenance work of every 100, 250, 500 and 1000 hours of operation at the same time.

CHANGE OIL IN STEERING, HOIST OIL TANK


WARNING
The parts and oil are at high temperature immediately after the engine is stopped, and may cause burns. Wait for the
temperature to go down before starting the work.
When removing the oil filler cap, turn it slowly to release the internal pressure, then remove it.

Refill capacity: 153 liters (40.39 US gal)

1. Lower the dump body and stop the engine.


2. Turn the cap of oil filler (F) to release the internal pressure
before removing the cap.
3. Remove drain plug (1), then loosen drain plug (2) slowly to
avoid getting oil on yourself, and drain the oil.
4. Pour in the specified amount of engine oil from oil filler (F).
After adding oil, check that the oil is at the specified level. See
CHECK OIL LEVEL IN STEERING AND HOIST OIL TANK,
ADD OIL (PAGE 3-60).

4 - 63
.

SERVICE PROCEDURE MAINTENANCE

CHANGE OIL IN REAR BRAKE COOLING OIL TANK


WARNING
The parts and oil are at high temperature immediately after the engine is stopped, and may cause burns. Wait for the
temperature to go down before starting the work.
When removing the oil filler cap, turn it slowly to release the internal pressure, then remove it.

Refill capacity: 246 liters (64.94 US gal)

1. Lower the dump body and stop the engine.


2. Turn the cap of oil filler (F) to release the internal pressure
before removing the cap.

3. Remove drain plug (1), then loosen drain plug (2) slowly to
avoid getting oil on yourself, and drain the oil.
4. Pour in the specified amount of engine oil from oil filler (F).
5. For details of the oil to use, see CHECK OIL LEVEL IN REAR
BRAKE COOLING OIL TANK, ADD OIL (PAGE 3-60).

4 - 64
.

MAINTENANCE SERVICE PROCEDURE

CHANGE OIL IN FINAL DRIVE CASE


WARNING
The parts and oil are at high temperature immediately after the engine is stopped, and may cause serious burns. Wait for the
temperature to go down before starting the operation.
If there is still pressure remaining inside the case, the oil or plug may fly out.
Loosen the plug slowly to release the pressure.

Refill capacity (left and right each): 59 liters (15.58 US gal)

1. Stop the machine so that casting line (1) is horizontal and drain
plug (P) is at the bottom.
2. Remove drain plug (P), drain the oil, then tighten the plug
again.
3. Add oil through the hole for plug (G) to the specified level.
4. After adding oil, check that the oil is at the specified level. See
"CHECK OIL LEVEL IN FINAL DRIVE CASE, ADD OIL
(PAGE 4-38)".

CHANGE OIL IN DIFFERENTIAL CASE


WARNING
The parts and oil are at high temperature immediately after the engine is stopped, and may cause burns. Wait for the
temperature to go down before starting the work.
When removing the oil filler cap, turn it slowly to release the internal pressure, then remove it.

Refill capacity: 132 liters (34.85 US gal)

1. Remove drain plug (P), drain the oil, then tighten the plug
again.
2. Add oil through the hole for plug (G) to the specified level.
3. After adding oil, check that the oil is at the specified level. See
"CHECK OIL LEVEL IN DIFFERENTIAL CASE, ADD OIL
(PAGE 4-38)".

4 - 65
.

SERVICE PROCEDURE MAINTENANCE

CLEAN DIFFERENTIAL CASE BREATHER


WARNING
The parts and oil are at high temperature after the engine is stopped,
and may cause serious burns. Wait for the temperature to go down
before cleaning the engine breather.
When using compressed air, there is a hazard that dirt may be blown up
and cause serious injury.
Always use safety glasses, dust mask, or other protective equipment.

Remove the mud and dirt from around the breather, then remove
the breather and wash out the dirt from inside with clean diesel oil
or flushing oil.

CLEAN EMERGENCY RELAY VALVE


Contact your Komatsu distributor to have the valve disassembled and cleaned.

CHECK ALTERNATOR, STARTING MOTOR


The brush may be worn or have no grease on the bearing, so contact your Komatsu distributor for inspection or
repair.
If the engine is started frequently, carry out inspection every 1000 hours.

CHECK, ADJUST ENGINE VALVE CLEARANCE


Special tools are needed for the inspection and maintenance, so please contact your Komatsu distributor to have
this work carried out.

CLEAN, CHECK TURBOCHARGER


Contact your Komatsu distributor for cleaning and inspection.

CHECK PLAY OF TURBOCHARGER ROTOR


Contact your Komatsu distributor to have the rotor play checked.

4 - 66
.

MAINTENANCE SERVICE PROCEDURE

LUBRICATE DUMP CONTROL LINKAGE


(5 places)
1. Stop the engine.
2. Use the grease pump to pump in grease through the grease
fitting marked by the arrow.
3. After greasing, wipe off any old grease that was pushed out.

Apply grease to the parts of (A) mark (2 places) once every


year regardless of the operation time of dump control linkage.

4 - 67
.

SERVICE PROCEDURE MAINTENANCE

CLEAN AIR DRYER FILTER AND DEFLECTOR


(If equipped)
Always clean once every 6 months regardless of the operating hours.

1. Remove bolt (3), then remove cap (4).


2. Disassemble deflector (1) and filter (2) and wash in diesel oil.

REPLACE PLUG WITH STRAINER FROM MAKE-UP TANK OF REAR BRAKE CHAMBER
Replace this part every 2000 hours or every year, whichever comes sooner.

1. Change the oil in the rear brake cooling oil tank, and at the
same time remove the hose and tee installed to the top of the
make-up tank, then remove plug (1) and replace it with a new
plug.
2. When replacing the plug, check the oil in the tank, then add the
same type of oil as the brake cooling oil to fill to the top of the
tank.
3. Install the hose and tee to the top of the plug.

4 - 68
.

MAINTENANCE SERVICE PROCEDURE

EVERY 4000 HOURS SERVICE


Carry out the EVERY 100 HOURS MAINTENANCE, EVERY 250 HOURS MAINTENANCE, EVERY 500 HOURS
MAINTENANCE, EVERY 1000 HOURS MAINTENANCE, and EVERY 2000 HOURS MAINTENANCE at the same
time.

CHECK WATER PUMP


Check for play in the pulley, leakage of grease or water, or clogging of the drain hole. If any problem is found, contact
your Komatsu distributor for disassembly and repair or replacement.

CHECK AIR COMPRESSOR


Ask your Komatsu distributor to carry out this work.

CHECK FAN PULLEY AND TENSION PULLEY


Check for play of the pulley and leakage of grease. If any problem is found, please contact your Komatsu distributor.

CHECK VIBRATION DAMPER


There is the possibility of drop in the level of the damper fluid and runout of the concave surface. So, please contact
your Komatsu distributor to inspect or replace.

CHECK INJECTION PUMP RACK RUBBER BOOT, REPLACE


Check the injection pump rack rubber boot for cracks and oil
leakage. If any abnormality is found, please contact your Komatsu
distributor for replacement.

REPLACE INJECTION PUMP SCREEN FILTER


Remove injection pump cap (1), then replace screen filter (2) with
a new part.
The side of the screen filter with the holes is assembled facing the
inside.
Tightening torque of cap (1): 22.1 ± 2.45 N·m (2.25 ± 0.25 kgf·m,
16.3 ± 1.8lbft)

4 - 69
.

SERVICE PROCEDURE MAINTENANCE

CLEAN INJECTION PUMP OIL INLET STRAINER


1. Remove oil inlet strainer (1), soak the whole strainer in diesel
oil, then rinse it clean.
2. Blow compressed air in through the oil discharge port at the tip
of the strainer.

Repeat Steps 1 and 2 two or three times to clean the strainer.

Tightening torque of strainer (1): 11.3 ± 1.5 N·m (1.15 ± 0.15 kgf·m, 8.3 ± 1.1 lbft)

ADJUST FRONT WHEEL BEARING


Please ask your Komatsu distributor to carry out adjustment every 4000 hours or every 100,000 km of travel.

ADJUST REAR WHEEL BEARING


Please ask your Komatsu distributor to carry out adjustment every 4000 hours or every 100,000 km of travel.

4 - 70
.

MAINTENANCE SERVICE PROCEDURE

EVERY 15000 HOURS SERVICE


Maintenance for every 100, 250, 500, 1000, 2000 and 4000 hours service should be carried out at the same time.

CHECK, REPLACE STEERING A ARM MOUNTING BOLT


Check and replace the A arm mounting bolts, lock plate, and
holder.
Please consult your Komatsu distributor when checking and
replacing.

(1) A arm
(2) Front suspension
(3) Lock plate
(4) Bolt
(5) Holder

4 - 71
.

5-1
.

SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATIONS
HD785-5

Item Unit
Overall weight
kg (lb) 158605 (349724)
(unladen weight + max. payload + 1 operator (80kg(176lb)))
Unladen weight kg (lb) 66930 (147581)
Unladen weight (without body) kg (lb) 50900 (112235)
Max. payload kg (lb) 91000 (200655)
Struck m (cu·yd)
3
40 (51.8)
Dump body capacity
Heaped (2 : 1) m (cu·yd)
3
60 (77.7)
Komatsu SA12V140 diesel
Engine type
engine
Flywheel horsepower of engine kW(HP)/rpm 753.15 (1011) / 2000rpm
A Overall length mm (ft in) 10490 (34'5")
B Overall height mm (ft in) 5050 (16'7")
C Overall height at dumping mm (ft in) 10080 (33'1")
D Overall width mm (ft in) 5210 (17'1")
E Min. ground clearance (bottom of rear axle) mm (ft in) 810 (2'8")
Min. turning radius mm (ft in) 9900 (32'6")
1st km/h (MPH) 11.0 (6.8)
2nd km/h (MPH) 15.5 (9.3)
3rd km/h (MPH) 20 (12.4)
Forward 4th km/h (MPH) 27 (16.8)
Travel speed
5th km/h (MPH) 36 (22.4)
6th km/h (MPH) 49 (30.5)
7th km/h (MPH) 65 (40.4)
Reverse 1st km/h (MPH) 11 (6.8)
Sound level
Surrounding (sound power level L WA) dB (A) dB (A) 84
Operator's (sound pressure level L PA) dB (A)
dB (A) 79.2
measurement procedures described in ISO6394 or 86/622/EEC
Vibration level
Hands/Arms The weighted root mean square acceleration m/S2 2.07
Whole body Measurement standards: ISO7096 m/S 2
0.50

5-2
.

SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS

5-3
.

6-1
.

HANDLING PAYLOAD METER ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS

HANDLING PAYLOAD METER


There are two types of payload meter: a card type and a printer type. The explanation for the payload meter given
here is for the printer type. For details of handling the card type payload meter, see the separate operation manual
for payload meter II.

The payload meter inputs the signals from the pressure sensors, clinometer, body float detection, neutral detection,
and other signals, and calculates the weight of the load using its built-in micro computer. It displays the results on
the panel and also uses the external display lamps to show the condition of the load.
In addition, the data saved in memory can be printed out together with the date the load was dumped and the
number of loads.

NAME OF PARTS

(1) Calibration switch (6) Memory data clear switch


(2) Night lighting dimmer switch (7) Printer feed switch
(3) Clock setting adjustment switch (8) Print switch
(4) Clock adjustment shift switch (9) External display lamps
(5) Clock adjustment increase switch

6-2
.

ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS HANDLING PAYLOAD METER

EXTERNAL DISPLAY LAMPS


When the actual load is displayed, the lamps light up as follows.
Lamp 1 (green): Displays load between 56 tons and 67 tons
Lamp 2 (green): Displays load between 67 tons and 85 tons
Lamp 3 (green): Displays load between 85 tons and 91 tons
Lamp 4 (yellow): Displays load between 91 tons and 96 tons
Lamp 5 (red): Displays load over 96 tons
If the shift lever is not at neutral and the dump lever is not at the
FLOAT position, none of the display lamps light up.
All the lamps light up for 10 seconds after the power is turned
ON.
To prevent overloading, use the lamps for loading up to the point
where the 3 green lamps light up.

6-3
.

HANDLING PAYLOAD METER ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS

PREDICTION DISPLAY
In the case where the weight of the load changes as each bucket is emptied into the dump body, the average
weight of the load up to that point is calculated to predict what the weight of the load will be if one more bucket
is loaded. The appropriate lamp flashes, so it is possible to adjust the weight of the next load when operating the
loader.

The prediction display for the load level and the actual load display are shown at the same time.
Example:
1st bucket: 23 tons
2nd bucket: 21 tons (44 tons)
3rd bucket: 22 tons (66 tons)
4th bucket: 24 tons (90 tons)

If the load changes as above, the external display lamps will give the display in the table below.

6-4
.

ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS HANDLING PAYLOAD METER

OPERATING PAYLOAD METER


Resetting power (the power can be reset by turning the power ON.)
The display for the first 3 seconds is 88:88, and after that, the time is displayed for 7 seconds.
After 10 seconds, the normal display is given.
The printer feeds one line of paper and stops at the home position.

CONTENT OF DISPLAY
When the dump lever is at FLOAT and the shift lever is at neutral, the actual load is displayed.
When the load is less than 3.9 tons, or if the dump lever is not at FLOAT, the display is 0.
If the dump lever is at FLOAT but the shift lever is not at neutral, the time display is given.
A maximum of 200 cycles of data can be written to memory. If this level is exceeded, FULL is displayed. If FULL
is displayed, print out the data and clear the data from the memory. For details, see "DELETING DATA FROM
MEMORY (PAGE 6-7)".
After completion of operations, we recommend that you stop the machine, print out the data, and clear the data
from memory.
There may be a slight change between the load displayed at the loading point and the load displayed at the
dumping point.
Save the data to memory when the dump lever is raised.
When the machine is completely stopped, it is possible to carry out accurate calculation if the load is dumped
when the swaying of the machine has completely stopped. We recommend that the slope at the dumping point
be kept to within ±5 degrees.
When the value displayed by the payload meter becomes stable, move the dump lever to the RAISE position. If
the machine is still swaying violently when the dump lever is moved to the RAISE position, ***** is printed when
the print out is made.
When the dump lever is returned from LOWER to FLOAT, wait for at least 5 seconds before turning the starting
switch OFF.

OPERATION OF SWITCHES

WHEN CARRYING OUT CALIBRATION


Carry out calibration at the following occasions.
When the machine is delivered, and once every month after that.
When the gas pressure and oil have been adjusted in the suspension cylinder.
(When the suspension has been adjusted.)
When the machine has been modified and the unladen weight has changed more than 100 kg (221 lb).
When the suspension pressure sensor has been replaced.
When other modifications have been made around the suspension.
When the built-in battery has been replaced.
When CAL is displayed.

6-5
.

HANDLING PAYLOAD METER ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS

METHOD OF CARRYING OUT CALIBRATION


1. Set the machine with the dump body empty.
2. Place the shift lever at the N position, and press calibration
switch (1) for at least 2 seconds. (The letters CAL flash)
3. Drive the machine slowly and when the travel speed reaches
approx. 10 km/h (6.2 MPH), press calibration switch (1) again.
(The letters CAL light up) The display returns to the time
display to show that the calibration operation is completed.

Carry out calibration on a flat even road surface.


Travel in a straight line. (Distance: Approx. 100 m (328 ft))
Keep the machine traveling at a constant travel speed.
The calibration data are written to the internal RAM, and are retained even when the power is turned off.
To stop the calibration operation (when in neutral), press calibration switch (1) again. The display will change from
a flashing CAL to a flashing SCH. When calibration switch (1) is pressed again, the display will return to the normal
display.

CARRYING OUT SENSOR CHECK


1. Drive the machine unloaded on flat ground.
2. Set the shift lever to "N" and press calibration switch (1) for at
least 2 seconds, then press calibration switch (1) again for at
least 2 seconds. (The letters SCH will flash)
3. When traveling at a speed of approx. 10 km/h (6.2 MPH), press
calibration switch (1) again. (The letters SCH will light up) If the
display returns to the time display, the sensor check operation
is completed. If there is an abnormality in any sensor, the error
code is displayed.

Carry out the sensor check at least once every month.

PRINTING OUT
1. When print out switch (1) is pressed for at least 2 seconds, the
data are printed out.
2. When print feed switch (2) is pressed for at least 2 seconds, the
paper is fed.
To stop the print during the printout, press the print switch
again for at least 2 seconds.

Do not hold the paper coming out from the printer during the
printout. This will cause the print to overlap.

6-6
.

ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS HANDLING PAYLOAD METER

DELETING DATA FROM MEMORY


1. Print out the necessary data before clearing the memory.
2. Press memory data clear switch (1) for at least 2 seconds. (The
letters CLEA will flash)
3. Press memory data clear switch (1) again for at least 2
seconds to complete the data clearing operation.

After completion of work, we recommend that you stop the


machine, print out the data, and clear the data from memory.

RESETTING TIME

WARNING
Never try to reset the time when traveling.

1. When time set adjustment switch (1) is pressed for at least 2


seconds, the minute display will flash. Press time adjustment
increase switch (3) to set the minute display correctly.
2. When time adjustment switch (2) is pressed for at least 2
seconds, the hour display will flash. Press time adjustment
increase switch (3) to set the hour display correctly.
3. Following this, each time that time adjustment switch (2) is
pressed, the flashing point changes to day, month, and year.
Press time adjustment increase switch (3) to correct any item
that needs correcting.
4. After setting the time correctly, press time set adjustment
switch (1).

OPERATING LIGHTING DIMMER SWITCH


To change the brightness of the display, do as follows.

1. Each time dimmer switch (1) is pressed, the lighting becomes


one stage dimmer. If the switch is pressed again after it
reaches the dimmest level, it will change to the brightest level.

The brightness can be changed in 10 stages.


If it is pressed continuously, the brightness will change
continuously.

6-7
.

HANDLING PAYLOAD METER ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS

SETTING PAPER IN PRINTER


When there is only 30 cm (12 in) of paper remaining in the printer, a red line will appear on the left edge to show that
it is time to replace the paper.
Press the FEED switch to feed out the remaining paper.
Never try to pull the paper out forcibly.
Always use Komatsu genuine printer paper (7818-27-2910).

1. Open the roll of printer paper, fold the paper at a point approx.
3 cm (1.2 in) from the end of the paper, then cut the paper
straight along the fold.

Never cut the paper in the way shown on the right. It will cause the
paper to jam.

2. Set the print paper with the printing side facing up, and insert
it straight into the paper feed hole. If the FEED switch is
pressed while feeding in the paper, the paper will feed
automatically.
3. When the paper comes out from the printer, pass it through the
slit in the lid of the printer, then close the lid.

6-8
.

ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS HANDLING PAYLOAD METER

METHOD OF CUTTING PRINTER PAPER


1. Press the FEED switch to feed the paper out to the necessary
position.
2. Put the paper in contact with the cutter on the lid, then pull up
to cut the paper from one side to the other.

Do not pull the paper out and cut it without using the paper
cutter.

STORING PRINTER PAPER


The printer paper is thermal paper, so store it in a place where the temperature range is between 0°C (32°F) and
40°C (104°F).
Do not keep it in a place exposed to direct sun light.

IF ERROR MESSAGE "E-33" IS DISPLAYED


When the starting switch key is turned to the OFF position, the payload meter uses the internal battery to prevent
the load data from being deleted.
If the battery voltage drops, error message E-33 is displayed, so replace the battery as follows.

Replacing battery
Move the machine to a place where it is safe to carry out the replacement operation.
Parts to prepare
Crosshead screwdriver
Socket wrench (for M4 nut)
New battery (7818-27-2860)

1. Turn the starting switch key to the ON position, press the PRINT switch for at least 2 seconds, and print out the
load data from memory.
Do not start the engine when doing this.
2. Turn the starting switch back to the OFF position.
3. Remove the screws (M6 x 4) holding the payload meter, then
pull the payload meter out to the front.

6-9
.

HANDLING PAYLOAD METER ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS

4. Remove the connectors, remove the screws (top: M4 x 8, rear:


M4 x 3) of top cover (1) of the payload meter, then remove top
cover (1).

5. Remove the nut (M4) and the band holding the battery.
Do not wear gloves when carrying out this operation.
Be careful not to let dirt, dust, or metal particles get inside the
controller. Be careful not to drop any nuts or washers inside the
controller.

6. Pull the battery connectors up directly from the printboard to


remove them.
7. Push the connectors of the new battery down straight to
connect them to the printboard.
8. Fit the battery band, then fix the battery to the payload meter
with the nut (M4) and washer (flat spring).
Check that the battery has not moved out of position.
9. Install the top cover.
10. Install the payload meter to its original position on the panel.

After replacing the battery, do as follows.


1) Turn the starting switch to the ON position.
2) Press the memory data clear switch (CLR) twice to delete the data from memory. (The first time, it will flash;
the second time, it will light up and then display the load.)
3) Carry out calibration.
4) After carrying out calibration, operate the dump lever once FLOAT → LOWER → FLOAT with the dump
body empty.

Replace the battery within 48 hours.


The life of the battery is approx. 2 years.

6 - 10
.

ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS HANDLING PAYLOAD METER

OPERATION AFTER REPLACING CONTROLLER


After replacing the controller, always carry out calibration, and operate the dump lever FLOAT → LOWER →
FLOAT with the dump body empty.

IF ERROR MESSAGE "PAPE" FLASHES (PAPER JAM)


NOTICE
Never touch the printer head (white). If the printer head is removed, it is impossible to install it again.
Always be extremely careful not to let any dust or metal particles inside the controller.

If the paper jams, PAPE is displayed on the load display, so move the machine to a safe place and clear the paper
jam as follows.
1. Turn the starting switch key to the OFF position.
2. Remove the screws (M6 x 4) holding the payload meter, then
pull the payload meter out to the front.

3. Remove the connectors, remove the screws (top: M4 x 8, rear:


M4 x 3) of top cover (1) of the payload meter, then remove top
cover (1).

6 - 11
.

HANDLING PAYLOAD METER ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS

4. Use tweezers to remove the paper caught between printer


head (2) and guide (3).
Do not wear gloves when carrying out this operation.
When using tweezers to remove the jammed paper, press the
guide with your finger to make a clearance between the printer
head and guide to make it easier to remove the paper.
If there is any paper remaining immediately under the printer
head, turn gear (4) with the flat of your fingers to move the
head. If gear (4) is turned counterclockwise, the head will move
to the right.
5. After removing the paper, install the connectors before
installing the top cover.

6. Remove the printer paper remaining inside the printer, and cut
the leading end of the paper.
For details of the method of cutting the end of the paper, see
"METHOD OF CUTTING PRINTER PAPER (PAGE 6-9)".

7. Turn the starting switch key to the ON position, and press the
FEED switch.
For details of the method of inserting the paper, see "SETTING
PAPER IN PRINTER (PAGE 6-8)" .
8. Turn the starting switch key to the OFF position, remove the
connectors, then assemble to the original condition.

6 - 12
.

ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS TACHOGRAPH (TCO 15-6)

TACHOGRAPH (TCO 15-6)


EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS

(1) Instrument lock (12) Travel distance recording stylus


(2) Clock dial (13) Adjustment screw for speed warning lamp
(3) Clock operation confirmation aperture (14) Speed confirmation aperture for speed warning
(4) Speed scale lamp indication
(5) Speed indicator (15) Clock setting knob
(6) Speed warning lamp (16) Chart support
(7) Speed indication confirmation lamp (17) Pressing ring
(8) Odometer (18) Cutting knife
(9) Period indicating label (19) Instrument lighting lamp
(10) Speed recording stylus (20) Name plate
(11) Operator change recording stylus (21) Voltage indication label

INSTRUMENT LOCK
This (1) can be used for the instrument lock key when replacing the charts, or for operator change identification keys
1 and 2.

CLOCK DIAL
One line here (2) indicates one minute.

CLOCK OPERATION CONFIRMATION APERTURE


It is possible to check the action of the second hand with this (3) when the clock is working.

SPEED SCALE
This (4) is the scale for the machine travel speed.

6 - 13
.

TACHOGRAPH (TCO 15-6) ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS

SPEED INDICATOR
This (5) indicates the machine travel speed.

SPEED WARNING LAMP


When the machine exceeds the maximum set speed, the lamp (6) lights up to warn the operator.

Models with the speed warning lamp do not have the speed indication confirmation lamp.

SPEED INDICATION CONFIRMATION LAMP


This lamp (7) is interconnected with the speedometer and is used to confirm the speed indication. When using the
confirmation switch to light up the confirmation lamp during checks before starting, always check for any
disconnection in the three indication confirmation lamps.

Models with the speed warning lamp do not have the speed indication confirmation lamp.

ODOMETER
This meter (8) displays the total distance (km) traveled by the machine.

PERIOD INDICATING LABEL


This (9) indicates that it is for 7 days.

SPEED RECORDING STYLUS


This (10) records the momentary speed of the machine on the chart.

OPERATOR CHANGE RECORDING STYLUS


When the operator change key is used, the operator change is recorded on the chart (11).

TRAVEL DISTANCE RECORDING STYLUS


This (12) records the distance travel by the machine on the chart. One up-and-down recording motion is 10 km.

ADJUSTMENT SCREW FOR SPEED WARNING LAMP


The speed at which the lamp gives a warning can be set as desired with this screw (13).

SPEED CONFIRMATION APERTURE FOR SPEED WARNING LAMP INDICATION


This (14) is the speed indication aperture for setting the desired speed.

CLOCK SETTING KNOB


Turn this knob (15) clockwise to advance the hand, and counterclockwise to turn the hand back.

CHART SUPPORT
This (16) is the rotating part of the clock and has teeth to prevent the chart from slipping.

PRESSING RING
This ring (17) is a ring that presses the chart and holds it against the chart support.

CUTTING KNIFE
This knife (18) cuts the tape connecting the charts.

INSTRUMENT LIGHTING LAMP


This lamp (19) is used for light up the instrument.

6 - 14
.

ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS TACHOGRAPH (TCO 15-6)

NAME PLATE
This (20) indicates the type and model.

VOLTAGE INDICATION LABEL


This label (21) indicates the voltage.

METHOD OF USING KEY


There are three types of key. Key (1) with no mark is used for
opening and locking the instrument. Key (2) (marked with No. 1)
is change key 1, and key (3) (marked with No. 2) is change key 2.
With these three keys, it is possible to know the details of the
operation and the change of operator.
To use the change key, remove the instrument open/lock key and
insert change key 1 in the same key hole, then turn 45° in the No.
1 direction.
Use change key 2 in the same way and turn to the No. 2 direction.

The change key will only turn in the direction of its number.
The change keys cannot be used to open the instrument.

Recording width of chart


When using key with no mark: 1.45 mm (0.057 in)
When using key with No. 1 mark: 2.15 mm (0.085 in)
When using key with No. 2 mark: 0.7 mm (0.028 in)

METHOD OF USE
1. Check the operation of clock.
Watch through clock operation confirmation aperture (1) to
confirm that the clock is working.
The clock is electric, so there is no need to wind it up.
2. Open the cover.
Insert the instrument open/lock key in hole (2), turn
counterclockwise 90°, then pull open carefully.
The cover can be opened approx. 115°. Do not open it further
than that, or pull it strongly, or put anything heavy on the cover,
as these will cause failures.

6 - 15
.

TACHOGRAPH (TCO 15-6) ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS

3. Turn time setting knob (3) to set the time.

Precautions when setting time


Always set the time with the time setting knob. Turn the hand
in the direction of rotation 10 minutes beyond the correct time,
then turn back to the correct time.

4. Fill in chart.
Before inserting new chart paper, always fill in the required items. (Operator code No., machine code No., date,
etc.)
Fill in the above items with a steel pen.
Handle the charts carefully with clean hands, and do not fold or scratch them.
5. Push down pressing ring (4) holding the charts, turn counterclockwise, and pull out the pressing ring at the point
where it contacts the stopper, then remove the charts.
6. Insert new charts.
Remove pressing ring (4), then set the charts under cutting knife (5). When doing this, align the time on the
charts (for example when the starting time is 9 am) exactly with red point (6) on the instrument body.

Precautions when replacing the charts


When aligning the charts with the center of the chart support, do not force them into position or use your finger to
make the hole in the center of the chart paper larger. If the size of the hole changes, it may cause an error in the
recording.
Stop the engine completely before inserting the new charts.

Use Komatsu genuine charts (P/N: YZ762929-980) for 90 km/h (55.9 MPH) 7 days.

7. Close the cover.


Lift up the cover to close it, then turn the instrument open/lock key 90° clockwise.

Replacing instrument lighting lamp bulb


Raise contact piece (7), and take out the old bulb with a pincette.
It comes out easily.
After replacing, check that the contact piece is holding down the
lamp base firmly.
Use a 24 V bulb.

6 - 16
.

ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS REVO TACHOGRAPH (TCO 15-7)

REVO TACHOGRAPH (TCO 15-7)


EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS

(1) Instrument lock (14) Speed confirmation aperture for speed warning
(2) Clock dial lamp indication
(3) Speed scale (15) Clock setting knob
(4) Speed indicator (16) Chart support
(5) Speed warning lamp (17) Pressing ring
(6) Speed indication confirmation lamp (18) Cutting knife
(7) Odometer (19) Instrument lighting lamp
(8) Period indicating label (20) Name plate
(9) RPM scale (21) Voltage indication label
(10) RPM indicator (22) RPM recording stylus
(11) Speed recording stylus (23) Adjustment screw for RPM warning lamp
(12) Travel distance recording stylus (24) Speed confirmation aperture for RPM warning
(13) Adjustment screw for speed warning lamp lamp indication
(25) Total revolution counter

INSTRUMENT LOCK
This (1) can be used for the key to open when replacing the chart.

CLOCK DIAL
One line here (2) indicates one minute.

SPEED SCALE
This (3) is the scale for the machine travel speed.

6 - 17
.

REVO TACHOGRAPH (TCO 15-7) ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS

SPEED INDICATOR
This (4) indicates the machine travel speed.

SPEED WARNING LAMP


When the machine exceeds the maximum set speed, the lamp (5) lights up to warn the operator.

Models with the speed warning lamp do not have the speed indication confirmation lamp.

SPEED INDICATION CONFIRMATION LAMP


This lamp (6) is interconnected with the speedometer and is used to confirm the speed indication. When using the
confirmation switch to light up the confirmation lamp during checks before starting, always check for any
disconnection in the three indication confirmation lamps.

Models with the speed warning lamp do not have the speed indication confirmation lamp.

ODOMETER
This meter (7) displays the total distance (km) traveled by the machine.

PERIOD INDICATING LABEL


This (8) indicates that it is for 7 days.

RPM SCALE
This (9) is the scale for the momentary speed in revolutions per minute (rpm).

RPM INDICATOR
This (10) shows the momentary speed in revolutions per minute (rpm).

SPEED RECORDING STYLUS


This (11) records the momentary speed of the machine on the chart.

TRAVEL DISTANCE RECORDING STYLUS


This (12) records the distance travel by the machine on the chart. One up-and-down recording motion is 10 km.

ADJUSTMENT SCREW FOR SPEED WARNING LAMP


The speed at which the lamp gives a warning can be set as desired with this screw (13).

SPEED CONFIRMATION APERTURE FOR SPEED WARNING LAMP INDICATION


This (14) is the speed indication aperture for setting the desired speed.

CLOCK SETTING KNOB


Turn this knob (15) clockwise to advance the hand, and counterclockwise to turn the hand back.

CHART SUPPORT
This (16) is the rotating part of the clock and has teeth to prevent the chart from slipping.

PRESSING RING
This ring (17) is a ring that presses the chart and holds it against the chart support.

CUTTING KNIFE
This knife (18) cuts the tape connecting the charts.

6 - 18
.

ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS REVO TACHOGRAPH (TCO 15-7)

INSTRUMENT LIGHTING LAMP


This lamp (19) is used for light up the instrument.

NAME PLATE
This (20) indicates the type and model.

VOLTAGE INDICATION LABEL


This label (21) indicates the voltage.

RPM RECORDING STYLUS


This (22) records the momentary engine speed on the chart.

ADJUSTMENT SCREW FOR RPM WARNING LAMP


The speed at which the lamp gives a warning can be set as desired with this screw (23).

SPEED CONFIRMATION APERTURE FOR RPM WARNING LAMP INDICATION


This (24) is the speed indication aperture for setting the desired speed of revolution.

TOTAL REVOLUTION COUNTER


This meter (25) indicates the total number of revolutions (x 1000) of the engine.

METHOD OF USE
1. Open the cover.
Insert the instrument open/lock key in hole (1), turn
counterclockwise 90°, then pull open carefully.

The cover can be opened approx. 115°. Do not open it further


than that, or pull it strongly, or put anything heavy on the cover,
as these will cause failures.

2. Set the time.


Turn time setting knob (2) to set the time.

Always set the time with the time setting knob. Turn the hand
in the direction of rotation 10 minutes beyond the correct time,
then turn back to the correct time.
Check the clock operation with the movement of minute hand.
The clock is electric, so there is no need to wind it up.

3. Fill in chart.
Before inserting new chart paper, always fill in the required items. (Operator code No., machine code No., date,
etc.)
Fill in the above items with a steel pen.

Handle the charts carefully with clean hands, and do not fold or scratch them.

6 - 19
.

REVO TACHOGRAPH (TCO 15-7) ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS

4. Removing used charts


Push down pressing ring (3) holding the charts, turn counterclockwise, and pull out the pressing ring at the point
where it contacts the stopper, then remove the charts.

Handle the charts carefully with clean hands, and do not fold or scratch them.

5. Insert new chart.


Remove pressing ring (3), then set the charts under cutting knife (4), and below fan-shaped rotating transfer
shaft (5) on the right. When doing this, align the time on the charts (for example when the starting time is 9 am)
exactly with red point (6) on the instrument body.

Precautions when replacing the charts


When aligning the charts with the center of the chart support, do not force them into position or use your finger to
make the hole in the center of the chart paper larger. If the size of the hole changes, it may cause an error in the
recording.
Stop the engine completely before inserting the new charts.

Use Komatsu genuine charts (P/N: YZ762929-730) for 90 km/h (55.9 MPH) 7 days.

6. Close the cover.


Lift up the cover to close it, then turn the instrument open/lock key 90° clockwise. When operating the machine,
remove the instrument open/lock key.

Replacing instrument lighting lamp bulb


Raise contact piece (7), and take out the old bulb with a pincette.
It comes out easily.
After replacing, check that the contact piece is holding down the
lamp base firmly.
Use a 24 V bulb.

6 - 20
.

ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS USING DIFFERENTIAL LOCK

USING DIFFERENTIAL LOCK


DIFFERENTIAL LOCK PEDAL
The differential lock is used on snow-covered or muddy areas where the tires are likely to slip.
The left and right wheels on the rear axle are locked together to prevent slipping and to provide a powerful drive
force. This also helps to extend the service life of the tires.

(1) Differential lock pedal

WARNING
Do not use the differential lock pedal when traveling at high speed (4th gear, 20 km/h (12.4 MPH) and above).
Do not use the differential lock pedal when turning.

NOTICE
Do not use the differential lock pedal when the wheels are already slipping. This may reduce the durability.
First, stop the machine, then depress the differential lock pedal, and start the machine again.

6 - 21
.

USING DIFFERENTIAL LOCK ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS

DIFFERENTIAL LOCK PEDAL


This pedal (1) actuates the differential lock control.
When the pedal is depressed, the differential lock is actuated;
when the pedal is released, the differential lock is cancelled.

REMARK
When traveling on soft ground where the wheel on one side slips,
or when traveling on road surfaces where the tires are likely to slip,
depress the differential lock pedal. This actuates the differential
lock and makes both the left and right wheels rotate at the same
speed to prevent slipping.

PRECAUTIONS AND METHOD OF USE


Depress the differential lock pedal to actuate the differential lock 5 to 10m (16 ft 5 in to 32 ft 10 in) before entering
the area where the tires may slip.

REMARK
Using the differential lock before the tires slip makes it possible to obtain the full capacity of the differential lock, and
also extends the tire life.

If the differential lock is applied when the tires are already slipping, the durability may be reduced.
Do not actuate the differential lock when the tires are slipping.
If the tires should slip and it becomes impossible to escape, stop the machine, then depress the differential lock
pedal and start the machine again.
When traveling on road surfaces where the tires may slip, be particularly careful to avoid sudden changes in travel
speed (decelerating or accelerating).
Do not use the differential lock pedal when traveling at high speed (4th gear, 20 km/h (12.4 MPH) and above).
Do not use the differential lock pedal when turning.
If the differential lock is used when turning, it will cause the following problems.
It will be more difficult to turn than when the differential lock is not used, so the truck may be unable to turn on
curves where it could normally turn easily.
The inside wheels and outside wheels will turn at the same speed when turning, so one side will spin and
reduce the tire life, and it may also damage the road surface.
In order to absorb the difference in rotation of the left and right tires which is caused when the machine turns,
the differential lock disc will slip, and this will reduce the durability of the differential lock.
An excessive load will be brought to bear on the final drive, and this may reduce the life of the final drive.

NOTICE
If the tires are likely to slip on the road surface on curves, carry out maintenance of the road surface to reduce this problem.

6 - 22
.

ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS OPERATION OF ABS AND ABS/ASR

OPERATION OF ABS AND ABS/ASR


[ABS (ANTI-SKID BRAKE SYSTEM), ASR (AUTOMATIC SPIN REGULATOR)]

ABS: When the machine is braked suddenly or braked on a slippery snow-covered road, etc., this system works to
prevent the tires from locking and skidding. Accordingly, a stable machine behavior and good steering
performance is secured.

ABS/ASR: In addition to the above functions of the ABS, this system has a function to prevent slipping of the drive
wheels caused by excessive torque. Accordingly, the machine can start and travel normally even on a
bad or frozen road surface.

EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS

(1) Warning lamp (3) ABS/ASR main switch


(2) ASR information lamp (4) Troubleshooting switch

WARNING LAMP
This lamp (1) lights up at engine start and when the ABS/ASR is turned off or malfunctions.

ASR INFORMATION LAMP


(Yellow) (Also used as troubleshooting lamp)
This lamp (2) lights up when the ASR operates and during troubleshooting.

6 - 23
.

OPERATION OF ABS AND ABS/ASR ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS

ABS/ASR MAIN SWITCH


This switch (3) is used to turn the ABS/ASR system on/off.

TROUBLESHOOTING SWITCH
This switch (4) is used for troubleshooting.

6 - 24
.

ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS OPERATION OF ABS AND ABS/ASR

OPERATION METHOD

ABS OPERATION
WARNING
Always stop the machine before turning on the ABS/ASR main switch (3). If it is turned on while the machine is running, the
ABS/ASR may not function normally.

1. Turn on the starting switch (1). At this time, warning lamp (2)
will light up.

2. Turn on the ABS/ASR main switch (3). Start the machine.


When the speed rises to about 10 km/h (6.2 MPH), the warning
lamp (2) will go off.

If the starting switch (1) is turned on/off while the ABS/ASR


main switch (3) is turned on, the electric power for the
ABS/ASR system will also be turned on/off. Accordingly, keep
the ABS/ASR main switch turned on for normal operation.

ASR OPERATION
WARNING
Turn on the troubleshooting switch (1) only when performing troubleshooting on the machine. The ABS/ASR system will not
function while the troubleshooting switch is turned on.

1. Since the ASR and ABS are interlocked, if the ABS is turned
on, the ASR is also turned on automatically.

2. The ASR information lamp (2) lights up when the system


detects slippage of the rear wheels, and the ASR starts
functioning.

6 - 25
.

OPERATION OF ABS AND ABS/ASR ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS

PRECAUTIONS FOR USE


WARNING
If the ABS functions while traveling on a slippery road, the braking distance may be slightly lengthened. Even if the ABS is
turned on, the tires may lock when the machine is braked when running at a very low speed. Accordingly, take care when
driving on slippery roads.
If the machine is braked while running at high speed or on a slippery road, more air is consumed by the ABS/ASR. If the air
pressure drops and the warning buzzer sounds, stop the machine in a safe place. Wait until the air pressure is restored
sufficiently, then start again.
Even with the ABS/ASR system installed, there may be instances where the machine can not travel safely such as on a road
having an extremely low coefficient of friction (a frozen road, etc.) or on a steep slope. In this case, repair the road surface
before driving.

The machine can be travel normally even if the ABS/ASR main switch is turned off. In this case, however, watch
out for lateral skidding of the machine.
Even if the ABS/ASR system malfunctions, the machine can be travel normally. Watch out for lateral skidding in
this case, however, while traveling on slippery roads. If the warning lamp lights up, the system is automatically
turned off and the ABS/ASR system does not function.
Even if the ABS/ASR system is installed, the emergency brake function is maintained.
If the ABS/ASR main switch is turned on with the brake pedal depressed or the retarder control lever pulled,
exhaust sound will be momentarily emitted from the ABS valve. This does not indicate a fault.
If both rear wheels slip at the same speed, the ASR will not function. In this case, adjust the engine output with
the accelerator pedal.
When installing a wireless device on the machine, select one which does not violate the wireless device-related
laws/regulations and use it according to law. Mount it as far away from the devices and wiring harness of the
ABS/ASR system as possible.

TROUBLESHOOTING
When the starting switch is turned on, if the warning lamp does not light up, it may be broken. In this case, replace
the lamp.
If the ABS/ASR system malfunctions while being used, the warning lamp (Red) will light up. In this case, stop the
machine at a safe place immediately, then ask your Komatsu distributor to carry out repair.

The positions of each switch and the statuses of the corresponding warning lamps are as follows.

ABS/ASR
Starting switch Warning lamp
Main switch
OFF OFF Goes off
OFF ON Goes off
ON OFF Lighted (Normal)
Stays lighted until travel speed rises to about 10 km/h (6.2 MPH),
ON ON then goes off (Normal).
Lights up when a fault occurs (Malfunction).

6 - 26
.

ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS ARSC (AUTOMATIC RETARDER SPEED CONTROL)

ARSC (AUTOMATIC RETARDER SPEED CONTROL)


When traveling downhill, if the switch is pressed at the speed that is to be maintained, the retarder is automatically
actuated to prevent the travel speed from exceeding the set speed, so this makes retarder operations easy.

WARNING
The ARSC system is actuated when the system switch is ON. Before traveling downhill, check that the system switch is ON.
If the speed is set to a speed that exceeds the maximum permissible speed obtained from the brake performance graph, there
is danger that there will be overheating and that the retarder brake may be damaged. Always set the speed so that it does not
exceed the maximum permissible speed.
When the ARSC is actuated on slippery roads, the tires may lock. If this happens, cancel the ARSC.
If any abnormality occurs in the system and braking cannot be carried out properly, the alarm sounds and the system is turned
OFF to cancel the ARSC. If necessary, control the machine with the retarder control lever and foot brake to stop the machine
in a safe place, then turn the system switch OFF.

6 - 27
.

ARSC (AUTOMATIC RETARDER SPEED CONTROL) ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS

EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS

The position of system switch (1) may differ according to the combination of optional equipment.

(1) System switch (6) Retarder control lever


(2) ARSC set lever (7) Accelerator pedal
(3) Set speed display (8) Brake pedal
(4) ARSC caution lamp (9) Ready lamp
(5) Central warning lamp (10) Rear brake pilot lamp

(a) Set (c) Decrease speed


(b) Increase speed (d) Cancel

SYSTEM SWITCH
This switch (1) is used to turn the ARSC system ON/OFF.

ARSC SET LEVER


This lever (2) is used in the following cases:
When setting the travel speed
When making fine adjustments to the set speed (tap up/tap down)
When canceling the speed setting

6 - 28
.

ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS ARSC (AUTOMATIC RETARDER SPEED CONTROL)

SET SPEED DISPLAY


This (3) displays the speed (km/h) that has been set.
The display goes out when the system switch is OFF.
It displays 0 when the set value is canceled.
When the starting switch is ON or the system switch is ON, the display shows -- and then shows 0.

ARSC CAUTION LAMP


This lamp (4) flashes if there is any abnormality in the ARSC system when the system switch is ON.
It lights up for 3 seconds when the starting switch is turned ON to check the bulb.

CENTRAL WARNING LAMP


This lamp (5) lights up together with the ARSC caution lamp if there is a serious abnormality in the ARSC system
when the system switch is ON.

RETARDER CONTROL LEVER


Even when the ARSC is in operation, the retarder can be operated with this lever (6).

ACCELERATOR PEDAL
The ARSC is actuated only when the accelerator pedal (7) is not being pressed.

BRAKE PEDAL
This pedal (8) operates the wheel brake even when the ARSC is being operated.

READY LAMP
When this lamp (9) is lighted up, it shows that the travel speed is set and that operation of the ARSC is possible.
When it is out, the ARSC is not actuated.
It lights up for 3 seconds when the starting switch is turned ON to check the bulb.

REAR BRAKE PILOT LAMP


This lamp (10) lights up when the retarder or brake pedal are operated, even when the ARSC is being operated.

6 - 29
.

ARSC (AUTOMATIC RETARDER SPEED CONTROL) ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS

METHOD OF OPERATION

ACTUATION OF ARSC SYSTEM


The ARSC system is actuated when the system switch is ON.
If the set switch on the ARSC set lever is pressed, the travel speed at that moment is set as the downhill travel
speed. If the travel speed exceeds the set downhill speed, the retarder is automatically actuated.
The set travel speed is displayed on the set travel speed display and is stored in memory.
If the accelerator pedal is pressed while the ARSC is being operated, the ARSC is canceled and the speed
increases.
If the brake pedal or retarder control lever are operated while the ARSC is being operated, it is possible to reduce
the machine speed or stop in the same way as during normal brake operations.

METHOD OF SPEED SETTING

WARNING
If the speed is set to a speed that exceeds the maximum permissible speed obtained from the brake performance graph, there is
danger that there will be overheating and that the retarder brake may be damaged. Always set the speed so that it does not exceed
the maximum permissible speed.

If the actual machine speed during the setting operation is less than 10 km/h (6.2 MPH), the speed is set to 10 km/h
(6.2 MPH). In all other cases, it is set to the actual travel speed.
The travel speeds that can be set depend on the selection of the gearshift lever as follows.
When the shift lever is at the D, 5, 4, 3, or L positions, the range for the set speed is 10 to 55 km/h (6.2 to 34.2 MPH).
It is impossible to set the speed when the shift lever is at the N or R positions.

METHOD OF CARRYING OUT FINE ADJUSTMENT OF SET TRAVEL SPEED


To raise the set travel speed 1 km/h (0.6 MPH), push the ARSC set lever forward once.
To decrease the set travel speed 1 km/h (0.6 MPH), pull the ARSC set lever back once.

REMARK
Release the ARSC set lever after changing the set travel speed.
If the set and cancel operations are carried out at the same time, the cancel operation is given priority.
If the set and tap up operations are carried out at the same time, the tap up operation is given priority.
If the set and tap down operations are carried out at the same time, the tap down operation is given priority.
The tap up and tap down operations are used for making fine adjustment of the set travel speed.
It is possible to adjust the set travel speed up to ± 5 km/h (3.1 MPH) when traveling in ARSC (when the accelerator
pedal is released). When the accelerator pedal is being depressed, the ARSC is canceled, so it is possible to adjust
the set speed freely in a range from 10 to 55 km/h (from 6.2 to 34.1 MPH).

METHOD OF INCREASING SET TRAVEL SPEED


If it is desired to increase the set speed, depress the accelerator pedal to increase speed, and when the desired set
travel speed is reached, press the set switch on the ARSC set lever. The set travel speed will be changed to the new
speed.

6 - 30
.

ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS ARSC (AUTOMATIC RETARDER SPEED CONTROL)

METHOD OF DECREASING SET TRAVEL SPEED


If it is desired to decrease the set speed, operate the retarder control lever to reduce speed, and when the desired
set travel speed is reached, press the set switch on the ARSC set lever. The set travel speed will be changed to the
new speed.

REMARK
After using the retarder control lever to reduce the speed, return it to its original position.

TRAVELING AGAIN AT SET TRAVEL SPEED


If the machine repeatedly travels on the same slope, once the travel speed has been set, it is possible to operate
the ARSC without carrying out the setting operation each time.
Before entering a downhill slope, if the travel speed has been adjusted to a speed lower than the set speed displayed
on the travel speed display, the READY lamp (green) lights and the ARSC is actuated when the accelerator pedal
is released.

REMARK
When traveling at a speed greater than the set speed displayed on the travel speed display, the ARSC is not
actuated even when the accelerator pedal is released. When this happens, the READY lamp (green) also does not
light up. Always adjust the travel speed to a speed lower than the set speed displayed on the travel speed display,
and check that the READY lamp lights up.

METHOD OF CANCELING SET TRAVEL SPEED


Method 1: If the cancel operation is carried out for more than 1 second, the control is stopped. When this happens,
the set speed display shows 0.
Method 2: If the system switch is turned OFF, the control is canceled. When this happens, the set speed display
goes out.

REMARK
For Method 1, cancel operation must be continued for at least 1 second (different from other switches) to cancel the
control. This is to prevent any problem of the control being canceled if the switch is touched by mistake.

RELATIONSHIP WITH EXHAUST BRAKE


If the exhaust brake switch is at ON position (light is on), the exhaust brake is actuated in the normal way when the
accelerator pedal is released if the torque converter lock-up is ON (Lock-up pilot lamp lights up). When the machine
attempts to travel at a speed greater than the set speed, the ARSC is also actuated if the speed is set in the way
stated above.
If the exhaust brake switch is at OFF position (light is off), the exhaust brake is not actuated when the ARSC is being
operated. If the foot brake or retarder control lever are operated, the exhaust brake is actuated in the same way as
normal.
If the downhill slope is not steep and the engine brake and exhaust brake have ample effect, the machine will not
accelerate to the set travel speed, so the ARSC may not be actuated.

RECOMMENDED SET TRAVEL SPEED


Set the travel speed so that the engine speed is at least 1,800 rpm, and travel so that the retarder oil temperature
gauge is in the green range.

OVERHEAT WARNING
If there is danger that the retarder oil may overheat, the ARSC caution lamp lights up and the set travel speed is
automatically reduced 1 km/h (0.6 MPH) every 3 seconds. The lower value for the set travel speed when the speed
is automatically reduced is 10 km/h (6.2 MPH).

6 - 31
.

ARSC (AUTOMATIC RETARDER SPEED CONTROL) ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS

TROUBLESHOOTING

WHEN A PROBLEM OCCURS IN THE SYSTEM


This system is equipped with a self-diagnostic function. If any problem occurs, a failure code is displayed by the
controller LED under the assistant's seat.

Failure Remedy
No. Detail
code pattern*
1 0.1 Abnormality in power source 1
2 1.0 Disconnection, short circuit with ground, short circuit in engine speed sensor system 1
Disconnection, short circuit with ground, short circuit in transmission output shaft
3 1.3 1
speed sensor system
4 1.5 Short circuit with ground in retarder oil temperature sensor system 1
5 1.7 Disconnection, short circuit with ground, short circuit in accelerator signal 1
6 1.8 Disconnection, short circuit with ground in suspension pressure sensor (left) system 1
7 1.9 Disconnection, short circuit with ground in suspension pressure sensor (right) system 1
8 4.2 Disconnection, short circuit in exhaust brake signal system 2
9 4.3 Disconnection, short circuit in ARSC caution lamp system 1
10 4.4 Disconnection in READY lamp system 2
11 4.5 Disconnection, short circuit in central warning lamp system or buzzer system 2
12 5.2 Short circuit with ground in exhaust brake signal system 2
13 5.3 Short circuit with ground in ARSC caution lamp system 1
14 5.4 Short circuit with ground in READY lamp system 2
15 5.5 Short circuit with ground in central warning lamp system or buzzer system 2
16 6.0 Failure in engine speed sensor system 1
17 7.0 Disconnection, short circuit in set speed display up output 2
18 7.1 Disconnection, short circuit in set speed display down output 2
19 7.2 Disconnection, short circuit in set speed display clear output 2
20 7.3 Short circuit with ground in set speed display up output 2
21 7.4 Short circuit with ground in set speed display down output 2
22 7.5 Short circuit with ground in set speed display clear output 2
23 8.1 Short circuit with ground in pressure control valve system 1
24 8.3 Short circuit with ground in pressure control valve system 1
Failure in pressure control valve (retarder remains applied) or failure in pressure
25 8.5 1
switch 1 system
Failure in pressure control valve (retarder has no effect) or failure in pressure switch
26 8.7 1
1 system
27 8.9 Short circuit with ground in pressure cracking valve 1
28 9.0 Disconnection, short circuit in pressure cracking valve 1
Failure in pressure cracking valve (remains open) or failure in pressure switch 2
29 9.1 1
system
Failure in pressure cracking valve (does not open) or failure in pressure switch 2
30 9.2 1
system
31 9.3 Disconnection, short circuit in system switch system 1
32 9.4 Short circuit with ground in system switch system 1
33 9.5 Disconnection, short circuit with ground in travel speed set switch system 1
*See next page.

6 - 32
.

ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS ARSC (AUTOMATIC RETARDER SPEED CONTROL)

Remedy pattern 1
If the central warning lamp and the ARSC caution lamp flash and the buzzer sounds, it means that a serious problem
has occurred in the ARSC system.
Operation of the ARSC system is stopped. Operate the brake pedal or retarder lever as necessary to ensure safety.
When the system switch is turned OFF, the central warning lamp and ARSC caution lamp go out and the buzzer
stops.

REMARK
If the starting switch is turned ON when the air pressure in the air tank has dropped, failure code "9.2" may be
displayed. If this happens, start the engine and raise the air pressure to the normal level, then start again.
If the failure code is "9.3" or "9.4", it shows that there is a failure in the system switch, so even if the system switch
is turned OFF, the central warning lamp and ARSC caution lamp will flash and the buzzer will sound.

Remedy pattern 2
When only the ARSC caution lamp flashes
The ARSC system continues to be actuated, but an abnormality has occurred in the system.
Turn the system switch OFF to stop use of the ARSC.
When the system switch is turned OFF, the ARSC caution lamp will go out.

In the case of patterns 1 and 2 above, turn the system switch OFF quickly, stop use of the ARSC and contact your
Komatsu distributor for repairs.

The set travel speed display is also equipped with a self- diagnostic function, and a failure code is displayed on the
set travel speed display

Failure
No. Detail Method of resetting
code
Abnormality
1 E1 Turn the starting switch ON again or turn the system switch ON again.
in CPU
Abnormality
2 E2 Turn the starting switch ON again or turn the system switch ON again.
in memory

WHEN SYSTEM IS NORMAL


The code is displayed on the controller LED under the assistant's seat.

No. Code Condition


1 0.0 When accelerator pedal is being depressed ("." is not shown for 0 on the right)
2 0.0. When accelerator pedal is not being depressed ("." is shown for 0 on the right)

REMARK
If the above code is not displayed when the accelerator pedal is being depressed or not being depressed, it is
necessary to adjust the accelerator link. If it is not properly adjusted, the ARSC system will not be able to judge
correctly if the accelerator pedal is being depressed or not, so the ARSC may not work normally.

6 - 33
.

ARSC (AUTOMATIC RETARDER SPEED CONTROL) ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS

METHOD OF DISPLAYING MODEL SELECTION, TIRE LARGE DIAMETER/SMALL DIAMETER, FAILURE CODE

When the starting switch is turned ON, the codes below are automatically displayed in the following order on the
controller LED.
1. LEDs all light up.
2. Model
Code: 78
3. Tire diameter (Large/small)

Code Tire Large/Small


B. – Large size (standard)
S. – Small size (if equipped)

4. Latest failure code


5. Failure code that occurred immediately before the failure code in 4.
6. Failure code that occurred immediately before the failure code in 5.

METHOD OF CLEARING FAILURE CODE


Turn machine starting switch to ON (the engine is not started) and disconnect connectors CR1 and CR2 under the
assistant's seat.
When this is done, "– – " is displayed on the controller LED.
When the "– – " changes from flashing and stays lighted up (3 seconds), the failure code has been cleared.

REMARK
When using the ARSC for the first time, always clear the failure codes.
After clearing the codes, connect connectors CR1 and CR2.

6 - 34
.
PMC (POWERTRAIN MANAGEMENT CONTROLLER) AND MOM (MESSAGE FOR
ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE)

PMC (POWERTRAIN MANAGEMENT CONTROLLER) AND MOM


(MESSAGE FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE)
CHECK BEFORE STARTING
1. Turn ON the starting switch. If the maintenance caution lamp continues lighting up after all monitors and the
central warning lamp light up for approx. 3 seconds and then goes out, check the service code and its
description displayed on MOM and carry out the indicated checks and maintenance.
2. After starting the engine, move the shift lever to the N position while keeping the air pressure in the normal range
(the green range lights up). Pull the retarder control lever fully for 10 seconds or longer to check that the brake
does not exceed the wear limit. If the wear exceeds the limit, the maintenance caution lamp lights up and
simultaneously displays the service code and its description on MOM.
In this case, carry out checks and maintenance referring to "EVERY 1000 HOURS SERVICE (PAGE 4-58)".
Unless 15 minutes or longer has elapsed after the engine stopped, the maintenance caution lamp may light up
and the service code and its description may be displayed even if the oil level is shown as normal.

ABNORMALITY DISPLAYED DURING OPERATION


If an abnormality occurs during operation, the maintenance caution lamp also lights up and the service code and its
description are displayed.
However, the clogging of filters can not be detected unless the oil temperature rose to the specified value or over.
PMC detects abnormality in the maintenance items and displays the service code and its description on MOM
connected with PMC. If the controller other than PMC detects any abnormality, MOM also displays the service code
and its description and some message useful for operating the machine smoothly.

HOW TO DOWNLOAD THE STORED DATA IN PMC AND OTHER CONTROLLERS


Download of the stored data is available by connecting your service tool (personal computer) to PMC.
For details, see SERVICE MANUAL.

6 - 35
.
PMC (POWERTRAIN MANAGEMENT CONTROLLER) AND MOM (MESSAGE FOR
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE) ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS

MESSAGE FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (MOM)

(1) MOM panel

MOM is a message display for operator and service person, and has some touch switches in its surface.
MOM always informs operator of various and useful data as follows.
Machine conditions
When starting switch is turned on before starting engine
Engine start is OK or WAIT
The reason why engine start is not acceptable
When engine is running before departure
Departure is OK or WAIT
The reason why departure is not acceptable
Production data (Only when optional PLM II is installed in the machine)
Current payload
Total payload
Total numbers of cycle
Fault information at occurrence
Service code and its description
User code and its description
Others
Year/month/date, Clock

It is recommended to obey MOM's requests in order to drive safely, keep the machine good condition, and prevent
severe malfunction.
However, it is always possible to start engine and to depart because of emergency use even if MOM indicates WAIT.

6 - 36
.
PMC (POWERTRAIN MANAGEMENT CONTROLLER) AND MOM (MESSAGE FOR
ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE)

THE PICTURE OF INITIAL MESSAGE (i1)


When starting switch is turned on, the initial message (i1) is
displayed for three seconds after a system message (Japanese).
The picture number (i1), title, and program version number are
indicated in this picture. After displayed for three seconds, (i1) is
changed to the picture of initial check 1 (i2) automatically.

If PMC and any controller connected to PMC detect fault, (i1) is


changed to the picture of warning message (i6) automatically after
three seconds of initial message (i1).

THE PICTURE OF INITIAL CHECK 1 (i2)


This picture is displayed after (i1) is displayed and before engine is
started in order to inform operator that engine start is acceptable or
not.

When MOM judges that engine start is acceptable, "ENGINE


START OK" is indicated.

When MOM judges that engine start is not acceptable, "ENGINE


START WAIT" is indicated.

The reason why engine start is not acceptable is indicated also and they are as follows.
When parking brake is not applied, "PARKING BRAKE" is indicated.
When shift lever is not neutral position, "T/M SHIFT LEVER" is indicated.
Engine is able to be started even if "PARKING BRAKE" is indicated for emergency use. When shift lever is not
neutral position, change to neutral in order to start engine.

When engine is started, (i2) is changed to the picture of initial check 2 (i3) automatically.

If any controller detects fault, (i2) is changed to the picture of warning message (i6) automatically.

6 - 37
.
PMC (POWERTRAIN MANAGEMENT CONTROLLER) AND MOM (MESSAGE FOR
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE) ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS

THE PICTURE OF INITIAL CHECK 2 (i3)


This picture is displayed after engine is started and before shift
lever is changed from neutral position in order to inform operator
that departure is acceptable or not.

When MOM judges that departure is acceptable, "DEPARTURE


OK" is indicated.

When MOM judges that departure is not acceptable,


"DEPARTURE WAIT" is indicated.

Machine is able to be departed even if "DEPARTURE WAIT" is indicated for emergency use.
When engine is started, (i2) is changed to the picture of initial check (i3) automatically.

If you touch LIGHT OFF area in (i3), then the back light of MOM is turned off and (i3) is turned to be dark (i7). It can
be used when annoyed by the glare during the driving at night. If the dark picture is touched, the back light lights up
again.

If any controller detects fault, (i3) is changed to the picture of warning message (i6) automatically.

THE ORDINARY PICTURE (i4)


This picture is displayed while machine is running after shift lever
is changed to non-neutral position. Once shift lever is changed to
non-neutral position, (i4) keeps to be displayed until starting switch
is turned off even if shift lever is not at neutral position.

Time, current payload, total payload, and total number of cycle are
indicated in this picture.

MOM indicates data of current payload, total payload, and total


number of cycle only when optional PLM II is installed in the
machine.
The period that PLM II sends these data are as follows.
When PLM II recognizes that machine is loading condition, then PLM II starts sending the data of current payload
to MOM and keep sending data successively until payload meter recognizes that loading condition is finished or
machine is changed to dumping condition.
When PLM II recognizes the completion of loading, MOM's payload display value is fixed until the dumping.
When PLM II recognizes dumping condition.
If any data are not indicated in MOM, please dump, load, and dump again in order to initialize the recognition of
machine condition of PLM II. (Until the current payload, total payload, and total number of cycle are sent by PLM II,
it can happen that the data are not indicated.)
As to details of the operation of PLM II, see another payload meter operation manual.
When you want to change units of these data or adjust clock, contact your Komatsu distributor.
If you touch "LIGHT OFF" area in (i4), then the back light of MOM is turned off and (i4) is changed to be dark (i7).
It can be used when annoyed by the glare during the driving at night. If the dark picture is touched, the back light
lights up again.
If any controller detects fault, (i4) is changed to the picture of warning message (i6) automatically.

6 - 38
.
PMC (POWERTRAIN MANAGEMENT CONTROLLER) AND MOM (MESSAGE FOR
ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE)

THE PICTURE OF WARNING MESSAGE (i6)


When any controller detects fault, its occurrence is informed
operator of as follows.
MOM indicates the fault code, user code, and their descriptions
in the picture of warning message (i6).
Monitor panel also indicates the user code.
In case of need, the central warning lamp is turned on and off,
and the alarm buzzer is turned on also.
When the fault which has an exclusive caution lamp in dashboard
or has an exclusive caution area in electronic display panel occurs,
this exclusive caution lamp or area also turned on to light up or
flash. When the fault occurs, take proper action based on the user
code on monitor panel.
NOTICE
If user code "01 to 07" and "E-"are displayed alternately on the right upper
side of the monitor panel LED, stop the machine, confirm the user code (A),
then follow the procedure described next.

User code (A)


01: CHECK AND MAINTENANCE
02: STOP MACHINE AT SAFE SPOT
03: REDUCE ENGINE/MACHINE SPEED
04: STOP SAFELY/SHUT OFF ENGINE
05: WAIT WITH ENGINE MID. SPEED
06: START ENGINE/KEEP LOW IDLE
07: DO NOT RAISE BODY

Two fault information are indicated in one picture.


If the number of active faults is three or more, all information are able to be indicated by touching "FWD" or "REV"
area in (i6).
The number assigned to each fault is the order of occurrence.
1 is the oldest. The larger, the newer.
When the display of fault occurrence indicated in MOM is not necessary after confirmation, this indication is able to
be erased by touching the number of each fault area located at left side of description.

This action only erases the indication in MOM, therefore the fault is still active, monitor panel keeps indicating the
user code, and the other caution areas keeps on.

Once the indication of fault is erased, the same indication is not appeared until recurrence and detection of the fault.

When all faults are recovered or erased in MOM, i6 is returned to i2, i3, or i4 automatically according to truck
condition.

6 - 39
.
PMC (POWERTRAIN MANAGEMENT CONTROLLER) AND MOM (MESSAGE FOR
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE) ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS

THE BACK LIGHT OF PICTURE (i7)


The back light of MOM is turned off and nothing is indicated in (i7),
therefore please use this picture when MOM is too glaring while
operating at night.

By touching LIGHT OFF area in (i3) or (i4), (i3) or (i4) is changed


to (i7). If you touch any place in (i7), (i7) is returned to (i2), (i3), or
(i4) according to truck condition.

If fault is detected by any controller, (i7) is changed to (i6)


automatically with back light on.

If the display is too glaring when operating at night, turn on the


room lamp (only when the machine stops). If it is necessary to look
at the display while traveling, close the cover of the consol, and
look through the cover.

6 - 40
.

ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS ASR-II (AUTOMATIC SPIN REGULATOR II)

ASR-II (AUTOMATIC SPIN REGULATOR II)


ASR is a function to prevent slipping of the drive wheels caused by excessive torque. Accordingly, the machine can
start and travel normally even on a bad or frozen road surface.

EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS

(1) System switch (5) Retarder control lever


(2) ASR operation lamp (6) Accelerator pedal
(3) ASR caution lamp (7) Brake pedal
(4) Central warning lamp

SYSTEM SWITCH
This switch (1) is used to turn the ASR system on/off.

ASR OPERATION LAMP


This lamp (2) lights up when the system detects slippage of the rear wheels, and the ASR starts functioning.

ASR CAUTION LAMP


This (3) flashes if there is any abnormality in the ASR system when the system switch is ON.
It lights up for 3 seconds when the machine starting switch is turned ON to check the bulb.

CENTRAL WARNING LAMP


This (4) lights up together with the ASR caution lamp if there is a serious abnormality in the ASR system when the
system switch is ON.

6 - 41
.

ASR-II (AUTOMATIC SPIN REGULATOR II) ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS

RETARDER CONTROL LEVER


When ASR is operated, if the retarder gets started with this lever (5), ASR system stopps its operation.

ACCELERATOR PEDAL
ASR system operates only when the pedal (6) is depressed with the travel speed range of 0 to 30km/h (0 to 18.6
MPH). If stopps depressing the pedal, ASR system stopps its operaton.

BRAKE PEDAL
When ASR is operated, if this pedal (7) is depressed, ASR system stopps its operation.

ACTUATION OF ASR-II SYSTEM


ASR system can function under the condition that the system switch is turned on. ASR operation lamp lights up
when the system detects slippage of the rear wheels and the ASR starts functioning.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING


WARNING
ASR system operates when the system switch is turned on.
If abnormality occurs in the system and the travel cannot be controlled securely, the system is turned off with the warning
buzzer sound and the operation of the system stops. Stop the machine in a safe place immediately to turn off the system
switch.
Even with the ASR system installed, there may be instances where the machine can not travel safely such as on a road having
an extremely low coefficient of friction (a frozen road, etc.) or on a steep slope.
On a slippery road, more air is consumed by the operation of ASR. If the air pressure drops and the warning buzzer sounds,
stop the machine in a safe place. Wait until the air pressure is restored sufficiently, then start again.

The machine can be driven normally even if the ASR system switch is turned off. In this case, however, watch
out for lateral skidding of the machine on slippery roads.
If both rear wheels slip at the same speed, the ASR will not function. In this case, adjust the engine output with
the accelerator pedal.

6 - 42
.

ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS ASR-II (AUTOMATIC SPIN REGULATOR II)

TROUBLESHOOTING

WHEN A PROBLEM OCCURS IN THE SYSTEM


This system is equipped with a self-diagnostic function. If any problem occurs, a failure code is displayed by the
controller LED behind the assistant's seat.

Failure Remedy
No. Details
code pattern
1 0.1 Abnormality in power source 1
Disconnection, short circuit with ground, short circuit in engine speed sensor
2 1.0 1
system
3 1.1 Disconnection in RR wheel revolution sensor 1
4 1.2 Disconnection in RL wheel revolution sensor 1
Disconnection, short circuit with ground, short circuit in transmission output shaft
5 1.3 1
speed sensor system
6 1.6 Failure of steering rudder angle sensor 2
7 1.7 Disconnection, short circuit with ground, short circuit in accelerator signal system 1
8 4.3 Disconnection, short circuit in ARSC & ASR caution lamp system 1
9 4.5 Disconnection, short circuit in central warning lamp system or buzzer system 2
10 5.3 Short circuit with ground in ARSC & ASR caution lamp system 1
11 5.5 Short circuit with ground in central warning lamp system or buzzer system 2
12 6.0 Failure in engine speed sensor system 1
13 6.1 Failure in RR wheel revolution sensor system 1
14 6.2 Failure in RL wheel revolution sensor system 1
15 6.3 Failure in transmission output axis revolution sensor system 1
16 8.1 Short circuit with ground in pressure control valve system (right) 1
17 8.2 Short circuit with ground in pressure control valve system (left) 1
18 8.3 Disconnection, short circuit in pressure control valve system (right) 1
19 8.4 Disconnection, short circuit in pressure control valve system (left) 1
20 8.5 Failure in pressure control valve (right) or failure in pressure switch 1 system 1
21 8.6 Failure in pressure control valve (left) or failure in pressure switch 1 system 1
22 8.7 Failure in pressure control valve (right) or failure in pressure switch 1 system 1
23 8.0 Failure in pressure control valve (left) or failure in pressure switch 1 system 1
24 8.9 Short circuit with ground in pressure cracking valve 1
25 9.0 Disconnection, short circuit in pressure cracking valve 1
Failure in pressure cracking valve (remains open) or failure in pressure switch 2
26 9.1 1
system
Failure in pressure cracking valve (does not open) or failure in pressure switch 2
27 9.2 1
system

Remedy pattern 1
If the central warning lamp and the ASR caution lamp flash and the buzzer sounds, it means that a serious problem
has occurred in the ASR system.
Operation of the ASR system is stopped.
Stop in a safe place quickly and stop using the ASR by turning the system switch off.
When the system switch is turned OFF, the central warning lamp and ASR caution lamp go out and the buzzer
stops.

6 - 43
.

ASR-II (AUTOMATIC SPIN REGULATOR II) ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS

Remedy pattern 2
When only the ASR caution lamp flashes
The ASR system continues to be actuated, but an abnormality has occurred in the system.
Stop at the safe place quickly and turn the system switch OFF to stop use of the ASR.
When the system switch is turned OFF, the ASR caution lamp will go out.

In the case of patterns 1 and 2 above, turn the system switch OFF quickly, stop use of the ASR and contact your
Komatsu distributor for repairs.

WHEN SYSTEM IS NORMAL


The code (0.0) is displayed by the controller LED behind the assistant's seat.

METHOD OF DISPLAYING MODEL SELECTION, TIRE LARGE DIAMETER/SMALL DIAMETER, FAILURE CODE

When the starting switch is turned ON, the codes below are automatically displayed in the following order on the
controller LED.
1. LEDs all light up.
2. Model
Code: 78
3. Tire diameter (Large/small)

Code Tire Large/Small


B. – Large size (standard)
S. – Small size (if equipped)

4. Latest failure code


5. Failure code that occurred immediately before the failure code in 4.
6. Failure code that occurred immediately before the failure code in 5.

METHOD OF CLEARING FAILURE CODE


When the starting switch is at ON position (when the engine is not started), disconnect the connectors CR1 and CR2
located behind the operator's seat. At this time, "– – " is displayed on controller LED. When the flashing of "– – "
turns to the lighting up of "– – " (3 seconds), then failure code is cleared.

REMARK
When the ASR is used at the first time, be sure to clear the failure code. Connect the connectors CR1 and CR2 after
the clearance.

6 - 44
.

ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS HANDLING AUTO-GREASING SYSTEM

HANDLING AUTO-GREASING SYSTEM


This system uses a timer control to automatically carry out greasing for all parts of the machine. As a result, the
greasing operation can be carried out easily.

OUTLINE OF AUTO-GREASING SYSTEM

The dashed line shows the air line and the solid line shows the grease line.

1.The air from air tank (1) passes through solenoid valve (2) and air regulator (3), and is connected to the grease
pump (4).
2.The action of timer (5) or operation of the manual lube switch (6) on the dashboard sends compressed air to push
down follower plate (7) of grease pump (4), and grease (8) inside grease pump (4) is force fed to injector (9).
3.Injector (9) is connected to all greasing points and carries out greasing.

REMARK
Normally, the timer is actuated when the starting switch is turned ON and greasing is carried out at the set interval.
The manual lube switch makes it is possible to carry out greasing as desired, and is also used for bleeding the air
and other inspections.

6 - 45
.

HANDLING AUTO-GREASING SYSTEM ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS

SETTING GREASE CAN

NOTICE
Check that there is no dent in the can. If there is a dent, the follower plate will not go down to the bottom and it will be impossible
to carry out greasing.
This brings the danger of damage caused by insufficient greasing of the machine.

1. Release 4 latches (2) of grease pump (1), and open the top of
the grease pump.

2. Insert grease can (4) into case (3) of the grease pump.

The applicable follower plate differs according to whether the grease can is used or not. Use the appropriate part
No. follower plate.

Follower plate part No.


When using grease can 427-S95-2510
When not using grease can 427-S95-2520

REMARK
Follower plate 427-S95-2510 is applicable for cans with an inside diameter from 275 mm to 290 mm.

3. Insert the pump tube at the top of the grease pump into the grease, then set follower plate (5) inside grease can
(4).
4. Check that there is no leakage of grease from between grease can (4) and follower plate (5).
5. Secure with latches (2) at the top of grease pump (1).

6 - 46
.

ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS HANDLING AUTO-GREASING SYSTEM

INITIAL SETTING OF AUTO-GREASING SYSTEM

NOTICE
Use a suitable follower plate.
If the follower plate is not suitable, the grease pump will be unable to feed the grease even when there is grease remaining in the
grease can.
This brings the danger of damage caused by insufficient greasing of the machine.

1. Open top cover (1) of the timer box, then set greasing interval
adjustment screw (2) to 5 minutes.

2. Adjust the pressure of air regulator valve (3) to 0.39 MPa (4


kgf/cm2, 56.8 PSI).

3. Close top cover (1) of the timer box.

When starting to use the auto-greasing system, grease is not supplied sufficiently to the charging portion, so set the
timer to a shorter time. After 2-3 days, the grease will fill the charging portion, so set the timer to 20 minutes. Adjust
the timer setting according to the grease condition.

METHOD OF OPERATING AUTO-GREASING SYSTEM


With this system, when the machine starting switch is turned
ON, greasing starts automatically according to the interval set
by the timer.

When manual lube switch (1) on the dashboard is set to the ON


position, greasing will start regardless of the timer setting. When
the switch is turned OFF, greasing will stop.

REMARK
With the manual lube switch, it is possible to carry out greasing
regardless of the timer. This can be used mainly when checking
the action of the grease pump or when carrying out additional
greasing.

6 - 47
.

HANDLING AUTO-GREASING SYSTEM ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS

PRECAUTIONS WHEN HANDLING AUTO-GREASING SYSTEM

BLEEDING AIR FROM GREASE CIRCUIT


WARNING
When bleeding the air, the operation must be carried out by two workers who cannot see each other: one in the operator's seat
and one under the machine. When carrying out the operation, maintain contact with each other and check that you understand
the content of your partner's work. If the machine is moved without warning, there is danger that the worker operating under the
machine will be caught in the machine and suffer serious personal injury.

NOTICE
Always bleed the air from the grease circuit. If there is air in the grease circuit, the grease pressure will not rise to the specified
pressure, and this will lead to damage from insufficient lubrication at all parts of the machine.

1. Remove blind plug (2) from the tip of injector manifold (1) at the
rear right of the front axle of the machine.

2. Turn the starting switch ON.

3. Turn manual lube switch (3) ON.

4. Milky white grease mixed with air comes out from the hole for
blind plug (2) in manifold (1). When this milky white grease
changes to normal grease, turn manual lube switch (3) OFF.

5. Install blind plug (2) to manifold (1).

6 - 48
.

ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS HANDLING AUTO-GREASING SYSTEM

6. Remove blind plug (5) from the tip of injector manifold (4) at the
rear left of the front axle of the machine.
7. Turn the starting switch ON.
8. Turn manual lube switch (3) ON.
9. Milky white grease mixed with air comes out from the hole for
blind plug (5) in manifold (4). When this milky white grease
changes to normal grease, turn manual lube switch (3) OFF.
10. Install blind plug (5) to manifold (4).

11. Remove blind plug (7) from the tip of injector manifold (6) at the
rear of the rear axle of the machine.
12. Turn the starting switch ON.
13. Turn manual lube switch (3) ON.
14. Milky white grease mixed with air comes out from the hole for
blind plug (7) in manifold (6). When this milky white grease
changes to normal grease, turn manual lube switch (3) OFF.
15. Install blind plug (6) to manifold (7).

6 - 49
.

HANDLING AUTO-GREASING SYSTEM ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS

CHARGING BRANCH LINE WITH GREASE


1. Remove cap (3) of grease fitting (2) of each injector (1).

2. Using a grease pump, charge each grease fitting (2) with


grease to fill the branch line with grease up to the greasing
point.

CHECKING OPERATION OF INJECTOR


1. Turn the starting switch ON.

2. Check that the indicator of each injector moves up and down


one stroke when greasing.
If the indicator does not move one stroke, greasing is not being
carried out properly.
Bleed the air. If the indicator still does not move, please contact
your Komatsu distributor.

6 - 50
.

ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS HANDLING AUTO-GREASING SYSTEM

ADJUSTING GREASE DISCHARGE AMOUNT

It is possible to adjust the injector within a range of 0.128 cc to 1.28 cc for one cycle.
Set to the injector to the minimum discharge amount. When changing the discharge amount, adjust as follows.

1. Remove cap (1) of the injector.

2. Loosen locknut (2) and turn adjustment nut (3) to adjust.

The relationship between the adjustment nut and the discharge amount is as follows.

Turning adjustment nut Discharge amount per turn


Turn adjustment nut clockwise until it contacts stopper 0.128 cc (minimum)
Turn adjustment nut counterclockwise 10 turns from stopper position 1.28 cc (maximum)

REMARK
After the nut contacts the stopper, turn it back counterclockwise. The discharge amount is reduced according to the
amount the nut is turned back.

6 - 51
.

HANDLING AUTO-GREASING SYSTEM ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS

POSITION OF EACH INJECTOR


The relationship between each injector and the greasing point is as follows.

Front right

(1) Right knuckle arm (right) (4) Right knuckle arm (rear)
(2) Right steering cylinder (right) (5) Right front suspension
(3) Right tie rod (right) (6) Right knuckle arm (front)

6 - 52
.

ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS HANDLING AUTO-GREASING SYSTEM

Front left

(7) Left knuckle arm (left) (13) Left steering cylinder (right)
(8) Left steering cylinder (left) (14) Center lever
(9) Left tie rod (left) (15) Left tie rod (right)
(10) Left knuckle arm (rear) (16) Right tie rod (left)
(11) Left front suspension (17) Right steering cylinder (left)
(12) Left knuckle arm (front)

6 - 53
.

HANDLING AUTO-GREASING SYSTEM ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS

Rear right

(18) Right hoist cylinder (bottom) (23) Bottom right radius rod (rear)
(19) Right hoist cylinder (top) (24) Right rear suspension (bottom)
(20) Bottom right radius rod (front) (25) Right rear suspension (top)
(21) Top right radius rod (rear) (26) Right body hinge pin
(22) Top right radius rod (front) (27) Left body hinge pin

6 - 54
.

ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS HANDLING AUTO-GREASING SYSTEM

Rear left

(28) Left hoist cylinder (bottom) (32) Top left radius rod (front)
(29) Left hoist cylinder (top) (33) Bottom left radius rod (rear)
(30) Bottom left radius rod (front) (34) Left rear suspension (bottom)
(31) Top left radius rod (rear) (35) Left rear suspension (top)

6 - 55
.

HANDLING AUTO-GREASING SYSTEM ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS

GREASING POINTS FOR EACH INJECTOR


Greasing points for front right injectors

(1) Right knuckle arm (right) (4) Right knuckle arm (rear)
(2) Right steering cylinder (right) (5) Right front suspension
(3) Right tie rod (right) (6) Right knuckle arm (front)

6 - 56
.

ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS HANDLING AUTO-GREASING SYSTEM

Greasing points for front left injectors

(7) Left knuckle arm (left) (13) Left steering cylinder (right)
(8) Left steering cylinder (left) (14) Center lever
(9) Left tie rod (left) (15) Left tie rod (right)
(10) Left knuckle arm (rear) (16) Right tie rod (left)
(11) Left front suspension (17) Right steering cylinder (left)
(12) Left knuckle arm (front)

6 - 57
.

HANDLING AUTO-GREASING SYSTEM ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS

Greasing points for rear right injectors

(18) Right hoist cylinder (bottom) (23) Bottom right radius rod (rear)
(19) Right hoist cylinder (top) (24) Right rear suspension (bottom)
(20) Bottom right radius rod (front) (25) Right rear suspension (top)
(21) Top right radius rod (rear) (26) Right body hinge pin
(22) Top right radius rod (front)

6 - 58
.

ATTACHMENTS, OPTIONS HANDLING AUTO-GREASING SYSTEM

Greasing point for rear left injectors

(27) Left body hinge pin (32) Top left radius rod (front)
(28) Left hoist cylinder (bottom) (33) Bottom left radius rod (rear)
(29) Left hoist cylinder (top) (34) Left rear suspension (bottom)
(30) Bottom left radius rod (front) (35) Left rear suspension (top)
(31) Top left radius rod (rear)

6 - 59
.

7-1
.

HIGH ALTITUDE SPECIFICATIONS

The hydraulic tank on the high altitude specification machine is pressurized to prevent cavitation of the hydraulic
pump.
This section gives information about parts that are different from the standard specification machine. Any part not
given here is the same as the standard specification machine, so see the manual for the standard specification
machine for details.

EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS
PRESSURE CAUTION LAMP
This lamp lights up when the pressurizing pressure in the hydraulic
tank goes down. If it lights up, check that the pressurizing valve is
closed and that the pressurizing piping is not is disconnected.

If the body is raised to near the maximum height, the lamp may light
up, but this does not indicate any abnormality.

7-2
.

HIGH ALTITUDE SPECIFICATIONS SERVICE PROCEDURE

SERVICE PROCEDURE
WARNING
Always release the pressure inside the tank before removing the oil filler. If the pressure is not released, there is danger that oil
will spurt out. Close the pressurizing valve before removing the oil filler.

When carrying out any of the following operations, always stop the engine and release the pressure inside the tank
as follows.
"CHECK OIL LEVEL IN REAR BRAKE COOLING OIL TANK, ADD OIL (PAGE 3-60)",
"CHECK OIL LEVEL IN STEERING AND HOIST OIL TANK, ADD OIL (PAGE 3-60)",
"REPLACE STEERING, HOIST OIL TANK AND REAR BRAKE COOLING OIL TANK FILTER ELEMENT (PAGE
4-60)", "CHANGE OIL IN STEERING, HOIST OIL TANK (PAGE 4-63)",
"CHANGE OIL IN REAR BRAKE COOLING OIL TANK (PAGE 4-64)".
1. Pull pressurizing valve (1) to shut off the pressure coming from
the air tank.
2. After shutting off the pressure coming from the air tank, turn the
oil filler slowly and remove it.
3. After carrying out the procedure in Steps 1 and 2, change the
oil.

4. Return pressurizing valve (1) to its original position and open


the pressurizing circuit.

NOTICE
If the pressurizing valve is not returned to its original position, it will cause
cavitation and the hydraulic pump may be damaged.

CHECK BEFORE STARTING


Carry out these checks at the beginning of each day's work before starting the engine.
Check that pressurizing valve (1) is at the OPEN position and that
there is no dirt or mud stuck to muffler (2).

7-3
.

SERVICE PROCEDURE HIGH ALTITUDE SPECIFICATIONS

EVERY 2000 HOURS SERVICE

REPLACE HYDRAULIC TANK PRESSURIZING COMPONENT


Ask your Komatsu distributor to carry out replacement every 2000 hours or every year, whichever comes sooner.

ADJUSTING PRESSURIZING PRESSURE FOR HYDRAULIC TANK


When the component used to pressurize the hydraulic tank is replaced, the pressurization pressure must be
adjusted, so ask your Komatsu distributor to carry out the adjustment.

INSTALLING PRESSURE GAUGE


1. Stop the engine and close the pressurizing valve (1).
2. To avoid high pressure from being applied to the hydraulic
tank, turn the knob (2) of the pressure reducing valve fully in the
clockwise direction.

3. Pull the ring of drain valve (3) and release the air from the air
tank.
4. Remove plug (4) of the pressure reducing valve, then install
the pressure gauge. Use a pressure gauge that can measure
9.8 to 98 kPa (0.1 to 1.0 kgf/cm2, 1.4 to 14.2 PSI).

REMOVING PRESSURE GAUGE


1. Stop the engine, pull the ring of drain valve (1), and release the
air from the air tank.
2. Remove the pressure gauge and install the plug.

7-4
.

HIGH ALTITUDE SPECIFICATIONS SERVICE PROCEDURE

ADJUSTING PRESSURIZING PRESSURE


1. Start the engine and charge the air tank with air.
2. Turn knob (1) of the pressure reducing valve clockwise and set
the pressure to 49 kPa (0.5 kgf/cm2, 7.1 PSI).
3. Open pressurizing valve (2) and pressurize the tank.

4. Operate the dump lever to the RAISE position and raise the
dump body slowly. With this operation, the indicator on the
pressure gauge will go down.

5. Operate the dump lever to the FLOAT position and lower the
dump body slowly. With this operation, the indicator on the
pressure gauge will go up to a point where the air is discharged
from the quick relief valve, and the rise in pressure stops.
6. Repeat the procedure in Steps 4 and 5 2 to 3 times and seat in
the dump body. The value indicated by the pressure gauge
when the dump body is seated is the set pressure at that point.
7. Turn knob (1) of the pressure reducing valve to set to the
specified pressure.
Specified pressure: 78.4 kPa (0.8 kgf/cm2, 11.4 PSI).
8. Repeat the procedure in Steps 4 to 7 to adjust the pressure.

7-5
.

INDEX

INDEX

<A> <G>
AIR CONDITIONER 3- 47 GENERAL PRECAUTIONS 2- 11
ARSC (AUTOMATIC RETARDER SPEED GENERAL VIEW 3- 2
CONTROL) 6- 27 GENERAL VIEW OF CONTROLS AND
EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS 6- 28 GAUGES 3- 3
METHOD OF OPERATION 6- 30 GENERAL VIEW OF MACHINE 3- 2
TROUBLESHOOTING 6- 32 GUIDES TO MAINTENANCE 4- 2
ASR-II (AUTOMATIC SPIN REGULATOR
II) 6- 41 <H>
ACTUATION OF ASR-II SYSTEM 6- 42 HANDLING AUTO-GREASING SYSTEM 6- 45
EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS 6- 41 METHOD OF OPERATING
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING 6- 42 AUTO-GREASING SYSTEM 6- 47
TROUBLESHOOTING 6- 43 PRECAUTIONS WHEN HANDLING
AUTO-GREASING SYSTEM 6- 48
<C> HANDLING OIL, FUEL, COOLANT, AND
CAR HEATER 3- 52 PERFORMING OIL CLINIC 4- 4
CAR STEREO 3- 38 HANDLING PAYLOAD METER 6- 2
CHECK BEFORE STARTING ENGINE 3- 54 EXTERNAL DISPLAY LAMPS 6- 3
CHECKS AFTER COMPLETION OF NAME OF PARTS 6- 2
WORK 3- 91 OPERATING PAYLOAD METER 6- 5
CHECKS AFTER STOPPING ENGINE 3- 74 HANDLING TIRES 3- 93
COLD WEATHER OPERATION 3-100
AFTER COLD WEATHER 3-102 <I>
PRECAUTIONS AFTER COMPLETION INTENDED USE 1- 7
OF WORK 3-101 DIRECTIONS OF MACHINE 1- 7
PRECAUTIONS FOR LOW
TEMPERATURE 3-100 <L>
CONTROL LEVERS AND PEDALS 3- 30 LOADING OPERATIONS 3- 87
LOCATION OF FIRE EXTINGUISHER 3- 53
<D> LOCATION OF FIRST AID KIT 3- 53
DETERMINING AND MAINTAINING LOCATION OF PLATES, TABLE TO
TRAVEL ROAD 3- 95 ENTER SERIAL NO. AND
DETERMINING TRAVEL ROAD 3- 95 DISTRIBUTOR 1- 8
MAINTAINING TRAVEL ROAD 3- 95 ENGINE SERIAL NO. PLATE
DRAIN WATER FROM AIR TANK 3- 91 POSITION 1- 8
DUMP OPERATIONS 3- 88 PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION
DUST INDICATOR 3- 35 NUMBER (PIN)/MACHINE
SERIAL NO. PLATE 1- 8
<E> SERVICE METER POSITION 1- 8
EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS 3- 5 TABLE TO ENTER SERIAL NO. AND
EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS 7- 2 DISTRIBUTOR 1- 9
LOCKING 3- 92
<F> LONG-TERM STORAGE 3-103
FOREWORD 1- 2 AFTER STORAGE 3-103
FUSES 3- 36 BEFORE STORAGE 3-103
DURING STORAGE 3-103

8-1
.

INDEX

PRECAUTIONS BEFORE TRAVELING RECOMMENDED BRANDS,


AFTER LONG-TERM STORAGE 3-103 RECOMMENDED QUALITY FOR
PRODUCTS OTHER THAN
<M> KOMATSU GENUINE OIL 4- 11
MACHINE MONITOR 3- 5 REVO TACHOGRAPH (TCO 15-7) 6- 17
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE CHART 4- 15 EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS 6- 17
MECHATRONICS EQUIPMENT METHOD OF USE 6- 19
CONTROLLER 3- 34
MOVING MACHINE OFF (FORWARD, <S>
REVERSE), STOPPING 3- 75 SAFETY CRITICAL PARTS 4- 14
SAFETY INFORMATION 1- 5
<O> SAFETY INFORMATION 2- 2
OPERATION 3- 54 SAFETY LABELS 2- 4
OPERATION OF ABS AND ABS/ASR 6- 23 SAFETY PIN 3- 35
EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS 6- 23 SERVICE PROCEDURE 4- 18
OPERATION METHOD 6- 25 CHECK BEFORE STARTING 4- 36
PRECAUTIONS FOR USE 6- 26 EVERY 100 HOURS SERVICE 4- 37
TROUBLESHOOTING 6- 26 EVERY 1000 HOURS SERVICE 4- 58
OPERATIONS, CHECKS AFTER EVERY 15000 HOURS SERVICE 4- 71
STARTING ENGINE 3- 73 EVERY 2000 HOURS SERVICE 4- 63
OUTLINE OF ELECTRIC SYSTEM 4- 7 EVERY 250 HOURS SERVICE 4- 38
OUTLINE OF SERVICE 4- 4 EVERY 4000 HOURS SERVICE 4- 69
EVERY 500 HOURS SERVICE 4- 53
<P> INITIAL 250 HOURS SERVICE (ONLY
PARKING MACHINE 3- 90 AFTER THE FIRST 250 HOURS) 4- 18
PERIODIC REPLACEMENT OF SAFETY WHEN REQUIRED 4- 19
CRITICAL PARTS 4- 13 SERVICE PROCEDURE 7- 3
PMC (POWERTRAIN MANAGEMENT CHECK BEFORE STARTING 7- 3
CONTROLLER) AND MOM (MESSAGE EVERY 2000 HOURS SERVICE 7- 4
FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE) 6- 35 SHIFTING GEAR 3- 80
ABNORMALITY DISPLAYED DURING SPECIFICATIONS 5- 2
OPERATION 6- 35 STANDARD TIGHTENING TORQUES
CHECK BEFORE STARTING 6- 35 FOR BOLTS AND NUTS 4- 12
HOW TO DOWNLOAD THE STORED STARTING ENGINE 3- 70
DATE IN PMC AND OTHER STEERING THE MACHINE 3- 87
CONTROLLERS 6- 35 STOPPING ENGINE 3- 74
MESSAGE FOR OPERATION AND SWITCHES 3- 22
MAINTENANCE (MOM) 6- 36
PRECAUTIONS DURING OPERATION 2- 19 <T>
AFTER STARTING ENGINE 2- 21 TACHOGRAPH (TCO 15-6) 6- 13
BATTERY 2- 24 EXPLANATION OF COMPONENTS 6- 13
BEFORE STARTING ENGINE 2- 19 METHOD OF USE 6- 15
TOWING 2- 26 METHOD OF USING KEY 6- 15
PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE 2- 27 TORQUE LIST 4- 12
PRECAUTIONS FOR OPERATION 3- 89 TRANSPORTATION 3- 96
PRECAUTIONS WITH TIRES 2- 33 METHOD OF LIFTING MACHINE 3- 98
METHOD OF SECURING MACHINE 3- 97
<R> PRECAUTIONS WHEN
RECOMMENDED FUEL, COOLANT, AND TRANSPORTING 3- 96
LUBRICANT 4- 9 STEPS FOR TRANSPORTATION 3- 96

8-2
.

INDEX

TRAVELING DOWNHILL 3- 81 DIFFERENTIAL LOCK PEDAL 6- 21


TROUBLESHOOTING 3-104 PRECAUTIONS AND METHOD OF
AFTER RUNNING OUT OF FUEL 3-104 USE 6- 22
IF BATTERY IS DISCHARGED 3-109
METHOD OF TOWING MACHINE 3-104 <W>
OTHER TROUBLE 3-113 WEAR PARTS 4- 8
WEAR PARTS LIST 4- 8
<U>
USING DIFFERENTIAL LOCK 6- 21

8-3
.

HD785-5 DUMP TRUCK


Form No. TEN00042-03

©
2006 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
Printed in Japan 04-06

You might also like